MicrostockGroup

Agency Based Discussion => Adobe Stock => Topic started by: blvdone on February 26, 2024, 07:57

Title: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 26, 2024, 07:57
My ranking as of now is 1,220th with 9,808 photos in my Adobe Stock portfolio.  Last week was at about the same ranking too.  My lifetime ranking is around 1,600th.  So, I made a progress after adding 3,000 AI generated photos since last September or so.  I think many with higher ranking have a lot less photos/images on their portfolio than I do.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on February 26, 2024, 08:06
Weird. Don't even have one.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 26, 2024, 08:12
Weird. Don't even have one.

Click "Dashboard" and select "This Week" on the pulldown menu.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on February 26, 2024, 08:35
Weird. Don't even have one.



Click "Dashboard" and select "This Week" on the pulldown menu.


Still nothing unfortunately
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Her Ugliness on February 26, 2024, 08:42
You do not have a rank when your ranking is higher than a certain number. I think it was 40.000.





I still do not really understanding how ranking works.
I have a slightly worse weekly ranking than blvdone, but more downloads, so download number does not seem to be the (only) factor. Maybe revenue?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on February 26, 2024, 08:53
You do not have a rank when your ranking is higher than a certain number. I think it was 40.000.





I still do not really understanding how ranking works.
I have a slightly worse weekly ranking than blvdone, but more downloads, so download number does not seem to be the (only) factor. Maybe revenue?

Alright, then that's explains why I can't see my ranking.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Yakystockero on February 26, 2024, 08:59
Lifetime: 4200
This week (Monday noon) :  25 dl  1850º   
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: DaLiu on February 26, 2024, 09:07
No idea how the weekly ranking is working, doesnt seem right

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on February 26, 2024, 09:09
My ranking as of now is 1,220th with 9,808 photos in my Adobe Stock portfolio.  Last week was at about the same ranking too.  My lifetime ranking is around 1,600th.  So, I made a progress after adding 3,000 AI generated photos since last September or so.  I think many with higher ranking have a lot less photos/images on their portfolio.
Hey blvdone,

since the current ranking is somewhat behind schedule (this is not a real-time display), it would be more meaningful to post these values at the weekend.
Less tends to happen at the weekend and the weekdays are usually included in the ranking on Sunday, which only shows "movement" every 1-2 days.

Last week I had:
- 149DL, position 3,260
- 38k assets - of which approx. 4k videos, 7k AI images, 27k photos (mainly backgrounds and textures that almost dont sell)

Have a sunny day@all,
Michael
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 26, 2024, 09:19
No idea how the weekly ranking is working, doesnt seem right

Do you also sell videos?  I think the ranking is solely based on image sales.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 26, 2024, 09:20
My ranking as of now is 1,220th with 9,808 photos in my Adobe Stock portfolio.  Last week was at about the same ranking too.  My lifetime ranking is around 1,600th.  So, I made a progress after adding 3,000 AI generated photos since last September or so.  I think many with higher ranking have a lot less photos/images on their portfolio.
Hey blvdone,

since the current ranking is somewhat behind schedule (this is not a real-time display), it would be more meaningful to post these values at the weekend.
Less tends to happen at the weekend and the weekdays are usually included in the ranking on Sunday, which only shows "movement" every 1-2 days.

Last week I had:
- 149DL, position 3,260
- 38k assets - of which approx. 4k videos, 7k AI images, 27k photos (mainly backgrounds and textures that almost dont sell)

Have a sunny day@all,
Michael

That's true, but my last week's rank and this week's rank is about the same.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: MZP on February 26, 2024, 09:48
It would be nice if we managed to compile our rankings and try to make a sense out of it. I have attached my current ranking. But I also agree that it is more relevant towards the end of the week. Thet is why I am also giving last week's stats

At the end of last week, these were my numbers:
Weekly Rank 3,010
Weekly Downloads/Revenue 154/$119
Portfolio Size 19.500 assets (mostly images, AI and non-AI; only ~200 videos and ~300 vectors)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on February 26, 2024, 10:09
The "ranking" seems to be  based on a fixed time every day (seems to update 1x per day). Not sure what time (I think it might be 12:00 a.m. PST).

It's calculated on your downloads at "that" specific point in time. So for people who have "more" downloads and "lower" ranking - it just means you had more downloads "after" the ranking was calculated.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: MZP on February 26, 2024, 10:18
It's true, it updates once a day. I think it reflects your position in the respective week (Mon-Sun), not in the last 7 calendar days. And I base this assumption on the fact that on Monday morning, until you get your first download, the weekly ranking will not be displayed at all. After your first download occurs, it just resumes Sunday's ranking, and then updates during the day.
LE: And this behaviour only occurs on Monday, no other day. Though it's strange and confusing that they chose to take last week's ranking as the starting point in the new week, instead of reseting it in the first day.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: pancaketom on February 26, 2024, 10:46
The other thing is the weekly ranking is for that particular week, so a week with major holidays might have a lot less downloads required for a higher ranking. based on my not scientific looking at it over the last year sales on Adobe have been going up faster than my own sales which are going up. I haven't followed the path of the AI though or uploaded all that many images.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: DaLiu on February 26, 2024, 10:57
No idea how the weekly ranking is working, doesnt seem right

Do you also sell videos?  I think the ranking is solely based on image sales.

Yes, i sell both, but look, another update for today and the position is not moving, no idea.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 26, 2024, 11:04
No idea how the weekly ranking is working, doesnt seem right

Do you also sell videos?  I think the ranking is solely based on image sales.

Yes, i sell both, but look, another update for today and the position is not moving, no idea.

You must have made a few good video sales today already.  Nice!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: DaLiu on February 26, 2024, 11:26
No idea how the weekly ranking is working, doesnt seem right

Do you also sell videos?  I think the ranking is solely based on image sales.

Yes, i sell both, but look, another update for today and the position is not moving, no idea.

You must have made a few good video sales today already.  Nice!!

No, those are images.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 26, 2024, 11:29
No idea how the weekly ranking is working, doesnt seem right

Do you also sell videos?  I think the ranking is solely based on image sales.

Yes, i sell both, but look, another update for today and the position is not moving, no idea.

You must have made a few good video sales today already.  Nice!!

No, those are images.

Oh nice!!  It's very rare for me to have high price image sale on Adobe Stock.  Maybe once or twice a sale over $10/photo.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: derby on February 26, 2024, 12:06
Yes it's not completely clear the timing and the way in wich numbers are calculated, by the way in general terms it's useful to understand your own trend
Sorry I don't remember how to attach the screenshot, I'm actually number 2980 this week with 31 downloads (around 27 USD, but it doesn't count for position.... I think)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: synthetick on February 26, 2024, 16:41
This ranking system is pretty meaningless for video contributors. It's obvious to me when I see people sharing screenshots of their rank on Discord that it is solely based on number of downloads not earnings.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on February 26, 2024, 18:16
This ranking system is pretty meaningless for video contributors. It's obvious to me when I see people sharing screenshots of their rank on Discord that it is solely based on number of downloads not earnings.
You're right - I've been observing this for a while now - the rank rises if you have a lot of downloads in a week, but with few but high downloads the rank still falls.

So it seems to be all about the number of downloads without average selling prices (RpD) - which is particularly meaningless for video sellers and high-priced sales.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on February 27, 2024, 03:50
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.



Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 27, 2024, 10:25
Down 10 spots to 1,230th from yesterday this week as of today.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on February 27, 2024, 12:10
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on February 29, 2024, 01:08
My weekly ranking is typically between high 9000s to high 12000s. At current it is right on 11000. I've 826 photos, 212 illustrations and 2054 videos.

I still get a good number of photo downloads considering the small port size and I don't have any AI contents.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on February 29, 2024, 02:27
more downloads, more money

when i reached pos 250 very briefly over the holidays i was earning a lot more and had over 100 sales a day.

then i dropped back down because i did not have enough content for january

my port is still very small, so i have drastic swings. with more content and more diversification there will hopefully be a more stable and higher weekly rank.

the rank also helps to see how overall downloads are doing. sometimes i move up although sales volume goes diown. then i know it is an overall drop.

a better factor would be a sales to port size indicator. that would give me visually the efficiency of my port.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on February 29, 2024, 05:46
It is obvious why Adobe only indicates the number of downloads with the ranking.
Otherwise with several data points as user rankings, you could use a statistical approach to scale up how much revenue the first rankings generate. The statistical distribution is probably similar to Benford's law.

But yeah Adobe could easily integrate more useful user statistics for the own port like earning per download, earning per image, share of sold images, best selling categories, etc.
Would be a favor for every contributor.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 29, 2024, 11:42
Down to 1,250th today.  I want to consistently go above 1,000th.  That's my goal this year.
If there are 100,000 contributors, 1,000th is top 1% elite.  Not bad.  I'm usually the bottom 99% in anything else.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on February 29, 2024, 13:51
I think if adobe gave better stats tools, it would help people to analyse their own ports much better. especially now that people can grow huge ports faster with ai.

a simple sales to port size, both as a total but also as an important weekly metric would help many people refocus.

also stats on acceptance/declines would certainly help.

what i like about the adobe system is that it is very dynamic. although my port is small it can move up very, very fast if my content is right for the season.

and of course it then crashes quickly if the time is over.

but if you focus on what is needed even a newbie account actually has a chance.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: MZP on February 29, 2024, 14:59
197 downloads = position 1,250 (blvdone)
112 downloads = position 2,560 (me)

So 85 downloads less puts me 1,310 positions lower
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on February 29, 2024, 15:25
197 downloads = position 1,250 (blvdone)
112 downloads = position 2,560 (me)

So 85 downloads less puts me 1,310 positions lower
May I ask how many files you got?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: MZP on February 29, 2024, 15:33

May I ask how many files you got?
[/quote]

Just shy of 19,900
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on February 29, 2024, 15:41

May I ask how many files you got?

Just shy of 19,900
[/quote]

That's a lot. Is that together with videos?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on February 29, 2024, 15:59
197 downloads = position 1,250 (blvdone)
112 downloads = position 2,560 (me)

So 85 downloads less puts me 1,310 positions lower

Actually totally makes sense.  It’s nearly half the downloads.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: MZP on March 01, 2024, 03:24
That's a lot. Is that together with videos?

About 200 videos and about 300 vectors. The rest are images (both AI and non-AI)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 01, 2024, 03:31
I think if adobe gave better stats tools, it would help people to analyse their own ports much better. especially now that people can grow huge ports faster with ai.

a simple sales to port size, both as a total but also as an important weekly metric would help many people refocus.

also stats on acceptance/declines would certainly help.

what i like about the adobe system is that it is very dynamic. although my port is small it can move up very, very fast if my content is right for the season.

and of course it then crashes quickly if the time is over.

but if you focus on what is needed even a newbie account actually has a chance.

Absolute agreement.
I wonder why Adobe doesn't integrate such statistics and provide a guideline on how you would analyze them in order to build a profitable portfolio.
I mean you could even give out an image ranking for a search prompt with keywords, which potentially a user would use.

The model taken from fotolia is simply outdated and dates back to the 2010s or even earlier when there wasn't so much content back. Agencies would just want enough contributors submitting stuff.
Now, after 20 years of experience in the industry, you could actually start to slowly change the submit flow and make things easier for contributors as compensation for lower commissions.

@blvdone
Nice! Have found your pond portfolio. I like the time lapses. Looks like from a professional television documentary.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 01, 2024, 04:30
That's a lot. Is that together with videos?

About 200 videos and about 300 vectors. The rest are images (both AI and non-AI)

I don't make that much. Have around 2500 images and 500 videos. Downloads are very little.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 01, 2024, 09:59
This is for today Friday

It is probably best to look at Sunday evening stats
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 01, 2024, 10:18
I'm down further.  I'm panicked!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: DaLiu on March 01, 2024, 10:27
Honestly, this ranking is useless, just focus on something else.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 01, 2024, 11:11
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.

Because it makes you FEEL good. To know you had more downloads than an invisible unnamed bunch of people.

Just like - who really cares if a facebook post you make has "1" like, vs "100 likes", vs "1000 likes". For all you know, facebook could be inflating those numbers (and - they actually have used fb users as an "experiment" to see if they could manipulate half a million people's emotions without their consent, just by what they showed them. Apparently the experiment was successful). But it makes you FEEL good if "1000 people liked your post" as opposed to "1" person... :P
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on March 01, 2024, 15:37
Progressed from weekly position of 11,000 to 10,700 with 14 further sales. Not great but RPD is better and above average. I knew early on when I started MS in 2019 I was not going to be able to achieve high volume like the above contributors, so pivoted focus to video - my recommendation for any beginner in stock with no or little collection of photos or specialized niche in demand as there more earning potential with overall fewer files.   
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 02, 2024, 07:03
Down 100 spots since Monday.  I feel depressed now.  But nobody here ranked higher than me in photos?  My main thing is stock videos.  I thought most here were doing better than me in stock photos.  I don't sell videos on Adobe Stock because I'm Pond5 Exclusive only for videos.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 02, 2024, 09:01
@superphoto

I am interested in the weekly rank data because i want to rebuild my full time stock income. Not just from Adobe of course.

Seeing where other people stand during the same week is very helpful to get an understanding how many more files i will probably need to get where I want to be for Adobe.

My goal is to reach a reliable 300 dollars or more per week from Adobe.

And looking at the data, it looks doable and I won‘t need 50 000 files.

I obviously still have to upload a lot more, I only have 4000 files.

And to diversify from seasonal content.

msg not taking my screen shots so

today

115 downloads, 87,46, 4000

currently 4017 files
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 02, 2024, 09:14
Progressed from weekly position of 11,000 to 10,700 with 14 further sales. Not great but RPD is better and above average. I knew early on when I started MS in 2019 I was not going to be able to achieve high volume like the above contributors, so pivoted focus to video - my recommendation for any beginner in stock with no or little collection of photos or specialized niche in demand as there more earning potential with overall fewer files.

That is a very good return for only 45 sales. Video is apparently really worth it. Much better average than photos.

Congratulations.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Her Ugliness on March 02, 2024, 10:37
Down 100 spots since Monday.  I feel depressed now.  But nobody here ranked higher than me in photos?  My main thing is stock videos.  I thought most here were doing better than me in stock photos.  I don't sell videos on Adobe Stock because I'm Pond5 Exclusive only for videos.

Rank 1080 here.


I think most of the contributors with ranks between 0-500 are probably not individual contributors anyways, but mass production companies with employees like Africa Studio and you will not find them posting here.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 02, 2024, 11:42
Down 100 spots since Monday.  I feel depressed now.  But nobody here ranked higher than me in photos?  My main thing is stock videos.  I thought most here were doing better than me in stock photos.  I don't sell videos on Adobe Stock because I'm Pond5 Exclusive only for videos.

Rank 1080 here.


I think most of the contributors with ranks between 0-500 are probably not individual contributors anyways, but mass production companies with employees like Africa Studio and you will not find them posting here.

Nice to see somebody higher than me!!  I disagree with you on mass production companies theory.  I think most in top 500 are individuals.  Probably half the top 50 may be production companies.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 02, 2024, 13:30
In my season I made it into the top 500, which meant over 100 dl a day on weekdays.

So I think the top 500 are doable for a single artist all year round with the right content and enough content. probably 30k+ files.

top 50 or maybe 100 for the studios and production companies.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: bpawesome on March 03, 2024, 00:12
This thread is really surprising to me...

First, because lots of people are sharing their earning stats and portfolio size all of a sudden, that is unexpected...
Second, it sheds some light on how the rank is calculated (downloads + earnings).

And, I expected that top 1k ranks would earn much more, which is somewhat discouraging...  :-\
I guess top 100 is where the real money is...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 03, 2024, 00:24
We don‘t know how many people share a rank.

It could be 10 000 people or more sharing the rank 1000

There are a lot of old timers with huge portfolios that never post publicly.

There are also very large Russian or Asian language stock communities.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: bpawesome on March 03, 2024, 00:29
We don‘t know how many people share a rank.

It could be 10 000 people or more sharing the rank 1000

There are a lot of old timers with huge portfolios that never post publicly.

There are also very large Russian or Asian language stock communities.

That's not how ranking works, you can't share a rank
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 03, 2024, 02:36
of course you can

you just need to have the same level of downloads

we also learned that it is based on no of downloads, not money.

so people could have a lower rank, but might be earning much more. good news for the video people

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 03, 2024, 08:46
This thread is really surprising to me...

First, because lots of people are sharing their earning stats and portfolio size all of a sudden, that is unexpected...
Second, it sheds some light on how the rank is calculated (downloads + earnings).

And, I expected that top 1k ranks would earn much more, which is somewhat discouraging...  :-\
I guess top 100 is where the real money is...


Yes, the ranking is strictly based only on how many photo/image downloads, not revenue.  Video sales are totally excluded.  And yes, you need to make it to top 100 to make a living from stock photo sales imo.  That's very difficult.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 03, 2024, 09:38
If you only do Adobe then yes, but if you have well established quality ports in many places, even if income is currently going down, there still are a lot of full time stock families.

Maybe not living in central London or New York, but 1200 - 3000 dollars can feed many families. And production is also a lot cheaper, hiring models and actors is very affordable in many countries.

The full timers often also have access to some of the high end agencies where sales volume is less, but the individual sale is higher.

But most people doing stock full time have gone dark on public forums. They do keep talking in closed little groups on social media.

But this thread is helpful to give people realistic expectations. It can help to balance the screaming youtube influencers.

Stock is very hard work and often better as a hobby than a full time job.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Ambu on March 03, 2024, 10:00
This thread is really surprising to me...

First, because lots of people are sharing their earning stats and portfolio size all of a sudden, that is unexpected...
Second, it sheds some light on how the rank is calculated (downloads + earnings).

And, I expected that top 1k ranks would earn much more, which is somewhat discouraging...  :-\
I guess top 100 is where the real money is...


Yes, the ranking is strictly based only on how many photo/image downloads, not revenue.  Video sales are totally excluded.  And yes, you need to make it to top 100 to make a living from stock photo sales imo.  That's very difficult.

That's not right, I upload both photos and videos, and very rarely I get photo sales there, sometimes 0 photo sales a week or even o photo sales a month. But I regularly get video sales, and my rank stay in between 15000-20000, even on the weeks when I get 0 photo sales
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 03, 2024, 10:17
Awesome earnings!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 03, 2024, 10:27
1700 today for weekly with 29 pages. (Can’t find where is my file count?)
My downloads are getting higher than my earnings, not many sales than one dollar.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 03, 2024, 10:28
1700 today for weekly with 29 pages. (Can’t find where is my file count?)
My downloads are getting higher than my earnings, not many sales than one dollar.

Your file count is lower left hand corner on the main dashboard. Just scroll down, and you'll probably see something like:
ALL(xxx) | Illustrations | Photos | etc, etc...

If you have 29 pages, means you probably have about 2900 files, since they list 100 items/page.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 03, 2024, 10:28
Awesome earnings:
SuperPhoto, 😻wow!!!!! My brain is blown in several ways: congratulations on 1st place! Your number is so large that I can’t even compute it 🤣 Your earning are higher than your downloads? and lastly, did you photoshopped this screenshot or created it with AI? 😉
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 03, 2024, 10:29
Awesome earnings!
😻wow!!!!!

Thanks :) Secret is taking lots of pictures of bananas :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 03, 2024, 10:46
Awesome earnings!
😻wow!!!!!

Thanks :) Secret is taking lots of pictures of bananas :)

And that is no joke! 🤣

“Italian artist Maurizio Cattelan’s controversial art piece, “Comedian,” made headlines back in 2019 after being sold for $120,000, a hefty price for a piece that is, quite literally, just a banana and a strip of duct tape.”

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Zero Talent on March 03, 2024, 11:46
Weekly Rank: 1,230
Downloads: 306
Total assests: 1,758
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 03, 2024, 11:57
Awesome earnings:
SuperPhoto, 😻wow!!!!! My brain is blown in several ways: congratulations on 1st place! Your number is so large that I can’t even compute it 🤣 Your earning are higher than your downloads? and lastly, did you photoshopped this screenshot or created it with AI? 😉

Whaaaaaaaat? You mean you don't think that is a REAL screenshot of earnings? :P

Watch this video to hear the 'whaaaat' :) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eXnybkQ24v0&t=10 (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eXnybkQ24v0&t=10)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 03, 2024, 13:10
1700 today for weekly with 29 pages. (Can’t find where is my file count?)
My downloads are getting higher than my earnings, not many sales than one dollar.

Not bad for less than 3,000 images.  Very efficient!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 03, 2024, 13:11
Weekly Rank: 1,230
Downloads: 306
Total assests: 1,758

Not bad for having zero talent!!  If you had a talent, you would go above top 100!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on March 03, 2024, 13:12
Awesome earnings:
SuperPhoto, 😻wow!!!!! My brain is blown in several ways: congratulations on 1st place! Your number is so large that I can’t even compute it 🤣 Your earning are higher than your downloads? and lastly, did you photoshopped this screenshot or created it with AI? 😉

Whaaaaaaaat? You mean you don't think that is a REAL screenshot of earnings? :P

Watch this video to hear the 'whaaaat' :) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eXnybkQ24v0&t=10 (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eXnybkQ24v0&t=10)

Yeah, never doubted you for a moment.  ::)

We don‘t know how many people share a rank.

It could be 10 000 people or more sharing the rank 1000


That's not how ranking works, you can't share a rank

Cobalt is correct, ranks are brackets not precise numbers. People do share ranks.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 03, 2024, 13:16
Awesome earnings!

My guess is you probably are in top 100.  People who are doing very well wouldn't want to share their stats.  I wouldn't be surprised if you are Yuri Arcurs.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on March 03, 2024, 13:58
Weekly Rank: 1,230
Downloads: 306
Total assests: 1,758

For someone with no talent whatsoever  :D, your performance is and remains absolutely impressive! Congratulations on these figures - that's really very good.
I have fewer pictures in my portfolio, but I'm more than clearly behind you. May I ask where your lifetime ranking is?
I have now slipped to position 2,700 and was once at 1,100 many years ago with a much smaller portfolio. In the meantime, 1,600 contributors have overtaken me. I'm too lazy and I don't seem to have the right touch for successful files anymore.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Zero Talent on March 03, 2024, 14:41
Weekly Rank: 1,230
Downloads: 306
Total assests: 1,758

For someone with no talent whatsoever  :D, your performance is and remains absolutely impressive! Congratulations on these figures - that's really very good.
I have fewer pictures in my portfolio, but I'm more than clearly behind you. May I ask where your lifetime ranking is?
I have now slipped to position 2,700 and was once at 1,100 many years ago with a much smaller portfolio. In the meantime, 1,600 contributors have overtaken me. I'm too lazy and I don't seem to have the right touch for successful files anymore.

Hey Wilm, Thanks!
I've always maintained that it's not about talent or artistry. It's all about engineering and understanding how to use tools efficiently to replicate successful outcomes. 😉

My lifetime rank is 1,360.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: MZP on March 03, 2024, 15:09
The end of yet another disappointing week :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on March 03, 2024, 16:09
Weekly Rank: 1,230
Downloads: 306
Total assests: 1,758

For someone with no talent whatsoever  :D, your performance is and remains absolutely impressive! Congratulations on these figures - that's really very good.
I have fewer pictures in my portfolio, but I'm more than clearly behind you. May I ask where your lifetime ranking is?
I have now slipped to position 2,700 and was once at 1,100 many years ago with a much smaller portfolio. In the meantime, 1,600 contributors have overtaken me. I'm too lazy and I don't seem to have the right touch for successful files anymore.

I've always maintained that it's not about talent or artistry. It's all about engineering and understanding how to use tools efficiently to replicate successful outcomes. 😉


Yes, I know! I remember our discussions. We won't come together on this because I disagree with you - as you know. Many people have technical know-how. But aesthetically useful and marketable results are not based on technology alone. Ultimately, however, it doesn't matter, because for the pure numbers it doesn't matter whether technical or aesthetic means lead to success.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 03, 2024, 17:56
Awesome earnings!

My guess is you probably are in top 100.  People who are doing very well wouldn't want to share their stats.  I wouldn't be surprised if you are Yuri Arcurs.

Hehe. I'll advise you to watch the same video I advised the other person, when saying "Whaaaaaaaaaaaaat?" ;)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eXnybkQ24v0&t=10 (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eXnybkQ24v0&t=10)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 03, 2024, 18:16
We don‘t know how many people share a rank.

It could be 10 000 people or more sharing the rank 1000

There are a lot of old timers with huge portfolios that never post publicly.

There are also very large Russian or Asian language stock communities.

That's a total BS saying 10,000 people sharing the rank.  No evidence whatssoever.  If 10,000 people are sharing the rank 1,000, the next rank after 1,000 is 11,000.  It's more like 10 people sharing rank 1,220.  Thus the next rank is 1,230.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 04, 2024, 01:48
You don‘t know that.

There are huge non english language stock groups. Perhaps 10k is an exaggeration but there are a lot more people active and successful than you see in this group. At pos 4000 it could very easily be 2000 people.

I.keep getting round number positions all the time - 4000, 3200, 3000 or even 250 etc…so it is brackets of people with same or close dl numbers.

It is not supposed to be an exact total ranking system
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: MZP on March 04, 2024, 04:31
Once you pass the 1000 mark, it becomes exact. No longer rounded
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 04, 2024, 05:22
I will check my screenshots from the happy days. That would be really interesting, if you get into the top 1000 the ranking is real?

dec 26 pos 253, dec 28 pos 263

I don‘t know why I cannot upload my screenshots? I keep getting an error message.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on March 04, 2024, 05:42
I will check my screenshots from the happy days. That would be really interesting, if you get into the top 1000 the ranking is real?

dec 26 pos 253, dec 28 pos 263

I don‘t know why I cannot upload my screenshots? I keep getting an error message.

If you are using a newer Mac, screenshots are generated in very high resolution. You then simply have to reduce the size by half. I assume that you can then upload them.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 04, 2024, 05:47
Managed to check my rank.

About 47 000 😂😂
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Shuttershock on March 04, 2024, 07:37
Be interesting to state ranking and earnings
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 04, 2024, 08:04
You don‘t know that.

There are huge non english language stock groups. Perhaps 10k is an exaggeration but there are a lot more people active and successful than you see in this group. At pos 4000 it could very easily be 2000 people.

I.keep getting round number positions all the time - 4000, 3200, 3000 or even 250 etc…so it is brackets of people with same or close dl numbers.

It is not supposed to be an exact total ranking system

My rankings are all in increments of 10.  So yeah, 10 people share the rank probably, not 100 nor 1,000.  That's bogus.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: pancaketom on March 04, 2024, 11:09
since the rankings are based on download numbers it makes sense that there will be a lot of people sharing ranks, especially at the middle of the bell curve for download numbers. There probably aren't that many people getting over a few 100 images a week (see previous post for how many), but in there are probably a lot of people getting the exact same number of downloads in the 10-50 range.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on March 04, 2024, 12:41
since the rankings are based on download numbers it makes sense that there will be a lot of people sharing ranks, especially at the middle of the bell curve for download numbers. There probably aren't that many people getting over a few 100 images a week (see previous post for how many), but in there are probably a lot of people getting the exact same number of downloads in the 10-50 range.

Yes, just imagine how many people have (making up a number) 20 DLs this week. The system at Adobe isn't going to make a group for 20-21-22-23-24 Etc.

Many people, and I'm one, if I look right now at my weekly rank, it's just showing - - -  and I know someone who has a lifetime that's that, because she hasn't made enough sales yet to be ranked at all. It's just a relative number to tell us, personally, how we are doing, compared to other people. And the fact that someone might have 30,000 images or 3,000 and someone else has 30, the rank is meaningless.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 04, 2024, 12:52
since the rankings are based on download numbers it makes sense that there will be a lot of people sharing ranks, especially at the middle of the bell curve for download numbers. There probably aren't that many people getting over a few 100 images a week (see previous post for how many), but in there are probably a lot of people getting the exact same number of downloads in the 10-50 range.

Yeah, of course at that low rank of 1-20 downloads per week, there are many ties.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 04, 2024, 19:52
I will check my screenshots from the happy days. That would be really interesting, if you get into the top 1000 the ranking is real?

dec 26 pos 253, dec 28 pos 263

I don‘t know why I cannot upload my screenshots? I keep getting an error message.
The highest that I noticed was 800. (I have to click something specific for my rank to show - lifetime or weekly - at times I can’t make it to appear, even in the same week. Maybe it’s a bug)

This website doesn’t accept.jpeg, but only accepts.jpg It also accepts png even they are in larger format. I actually have to go to photoshop to convert the file - a pain.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 04, 2024, 20:07
Be interesting to state ranking and earnings
Some people did, did I miss you sharing it as well?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 05, 2024, 10:00
Slow start this week.  It's depressing.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on March 05, 2024, 12:23
I will check my screenshots from the happy days. That would be really interesting, if you get into the top 1000 the ranking is real?

dec 26 pos 253, dec 28 pos 263

I don‘t know why I cannot upload my screenshots? I keep getting an error message.
The highest that I noticed was 800. (I have to click something specific for my rank to show - lifetime or weekly - at times I can’t make it to appear, even in the same week. Maybe it’s a bug)

This website doesn’t accept.jpeg, but only accepts.jpg It also accepts png even they are in larger format. I actually have to go to photoshop to convert the file - a pain.

I'm trying to understand what you wrote?

Here's what the site accepts:
Allowed file types: doc, gif, jpg, mpg, pdf, png, txt, zip
Restrictions: 4 per post, maximum total size 2000KB, maximum individual size 500KB

This could be important... maximum individual size 500KB

Here's what I think is the lowest position is, which could be thousands of people. No downloads will show - - -  at the beginning of the week.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: HalfFull on March 05, 2024, 16:32
Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on March 05, 2024, 17:26
Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.

Nice!!! Congrats for this!  :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 05, 2024, 19:29
Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.

You must have a great portfolio!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 05, 2024, 21:29
Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.

Congratulations! Especially as a solo artist this is a fantastic result.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 05, 2024, 21:44
Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.
Very impressive!
How many years did it take to upload 20k of images? Traditional photos or AI?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 05, 2024, 21:45

Here's what I think is the lowest position is, which could be thousands of people. No downloads will show - - -  at the beginning of the week.
Can you tell how many total contributors Adobe has?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: HalfFull on March 06, 2024, 02:36
Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.

Nice!!! Congrats for this!  :)

Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.

You must have a great portfolio!!

Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.

Congratulations! Especially as a solo artist this is a fantastic result.

Highest position = 97 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.
Very impressive!
How many years did it take to upload 20k of images? Traditional photos or AI?

Thanks everyone... appreciated.

I just checked my ranking spread sheet and it was actually 79 not 97 as my best performing week. Right numbers just wrong order.

If I remember correctly I started with Fotolia/Adobe sometime around 2013/14. I used to upload a lot to begin with but I've learned volume isn't necessarily king. Quality, quality, quality is my mantra now so I try to avoid volume for the sake of it. I'd rather submit 10 good images a month than 100 average. I love what I do so I feel very lucky in that sense!

No AI. For the work I do I just see too many mistakes that I'd have to correct. Not as much control/precision. By the time I've found the right AI image and corrected it, I could have taken / drawn it myself 😂. But, each to their own. It's what works for you that counts.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 06, 2024, 05:53
I am really impressed and it gives me hope.

You are currently king/queen of the solo artists jungle on msg...:)

I agree on the quality part, but I also experiment a lot so my port looks a little mixed.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 06, 2024, 10:38
Slow start this week.  It's depressing.
Mystery solved: accounts can share a rank!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 06, 2024, 10:44
Slow start this week.  It's depressing.
Mystery solved: accounts can share a rank!

If 10 people had the same number of sales, of course.  But not 10,000 people having the same number of sales at this level.  Maybe at the very bottom, it's possible 10,000 contributors share a rank with 0 sale.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 06, 2024, 11:02

If I remember correctly I started with Fotolia/Adobe sometime around 2013/14. I used to upload a lot to begin with but I've learned volume isn't necessarily king. Quality, quality, quality is my mantra now so I try to avoid volume for the sake of it. I'd rather submit 10 good images a month than 100 average. I love what I do so I feel very lucky in that sense!
Are you not afraid to be featured on top sellers list by uploading only best images that will sell? After copycats, I started to delude my portfolio.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on March 06, 2024, 16:17
Slow start this week.  It's depressing.
Mystery solved: accounts can share a rank!

If 10 people had the same number of sales, of course.  But not 10,000 people having the same number of sales at this level.  Maybe at the very bottom, it's possible 10,000 contributors share a rank with 0 sale.

That's true, but people with 0 sales do not get a rank. Look on Monday morning, just after Midnight. No sales, No rank.

Can you tell how many total contributors Adobe has?

Not really. We don't know anything about artist account numbers either. But if mine is 13-14 years old and 205931477 and yours in new, subtract and see how many new users since 2010. There are all kinds of pitfalls in trying to estimate how many users. Active users or dormant people who once uploaded, or DOA accounts of people who signed up and never upload or had any images accepted.

205 million?  ;D JoAnn's ID number is so low that Adobe software doesn't recognize her sometimes. Not enough digits.

Here's a number that might be of interest? In 2018 on Shutterstock, there were 17,877 artists who had 1,000 or more images. But SS said how many millions of contributors they had signed up.

I can't give a good answer, but I think what you would want to know is, how many active users and "active" would be our definition. Should we say, uploaded 20 images in 2023, or 100, or ??? That's pretty minimal and that's your competition. That and up. All of this is difficult to understand or define with any accuracy. That's why there are so many guesses and assumptions on the forum. We just don't know, and they (Adobe) aren't telling.

Good Luck, your main concern, and I don't mean this in a smart ass manner, you should be looking at what you produce and upload and your sales, and worried less about how images are ranked in a search, or how many images your competition has, or who or how many others are doing the same thing. Unlike many other businesses, knowing your competition in stock, isn't really useful for making yourself better or more money. Knowing what sells, yes of course, but not who or how many?

Your most important knowledge and information should be, how to make good and useful images that buyers want to download. And maybe as you move along, what is a waste of time, shooting, uploading and editing, because there's not enough demand?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 06, 2024, 16:35
@halffull - at a rank of 79 (or even hovering around 100), what approximate # of downloads is that per week?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on March 06, 2024, 18:07
Very slow this week and yet my ranking is slightly better than last week - which suggests everyone else is likely having a relative slow(er) week. RPD is also way down this week.   
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 06, 2024, 18:12
I'm moving on up from 1,400 yesterday to 1,320 today.  God is good!!

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 06, 2024, 20:00
Slow start this week.  It's depressing.
Mystery solved: accounts can share a rank!

If 10 people had the same number of sales, of course.  But not 10,000 people having the same number of sales at this level.  Maybe at the very bottom, it's possible 10,000 contributors share a rank with 0 sale.

That's true, but people with 0 sales do not get a rank. Look on Monday morning, just after Midnight. No sales, No rank.

Can you tell how many total contributors Adobe has?

Not really. We don't know anything about artist account numbers either. But if mine is 13-14 years old and 205931477 and yours in new, subtract and see how many new users since 2010. There are all kinds of pitfalls in trying to estimate how many users. Active users or dormant people who once uploaded, or DOA accounts of people who signed up and never upload or had any images accepted.

205 million?  ;D JoAnn's ID number is so low that Adobe software doesn't recognize her sometimes. Not enough digits.

Here's a number that might be of interest? In 2018 on Shutterstock, there were 17,877 artists who had 1,000 or more images. But SS said how many millions of contributors they had signed up.

I can't give a good answer, but I think what you would want to know is, how many active users and "active" would be our definition. Should we say, uploaded 20 images in 2023, or 100, or ??? That's pretty minimal and that's your competition. That and up. All of this is difficult to understand or define with any accuracy. That's why there are so many guesses and assumptions on the forum. We just don't know, and they (Adobe) aren't telling.

Good Luck, your main concern, and I don't mean this in a smart ass manner, you should be looking at what you produce and upload and your sales, and worried less about how images are ranked in a search, or how many images your competition has, or who or how many others are doing the same thing. Unlike many other businesses, knowing your competition in stock, isn't really useful for making yourself better or more money. Knowing what sells, yes of course, but not who or how many?

Your most important knowledge and information should be, how to make good and useful images that buyers want to download. And maybe as you move along, what is a waste of time, shooting, uploading and editing, because there's not enough demand?

I’m just curious, the only thing that I worry about are copycats. I think hard to come up with unique ideas and it’s disappointing to see them ripped off, including word for word descriptions, etc.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: poco_bw on March 07, 2024, 06:17
My ranking as of now is 1,220th with 9,808 photos in my Adobe Stock portfolio.  Last week was at about the same ranking too.  My lifetime ranking is around 1,600th.  So, I made a progress after adding 3,000 AI generated photos since last September or so.  I think many with higher ranking have a lot less photos/images on their portfolio than I do.
Not sure I understand how it work I have maybe 10K as well photos
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: poco_bw on March 07, 2024, 06:36
Awesome earnings!
😻wow!!!!!

Thanks :) Secret is taking lots of pictures of bananas :)
Obviously photoshoped, From the last intervew with Yuri Arcurs I see not even him do that by any means...and he got a RPD almost 3usd per download....crap.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 07, 2024, 08:53
Awesome earnings!
😻wow!!!!!

Thanks :) Secret is taking lots of pictures of bananas :)
Obviously photoshoped, From the last intervew with Yuri Arcurs I see not even him do that by any means...and he got a RPD almost 3usd per download....crap.

"Obviously" photoshopped? :) I can - actually honestly say - Adobe Photoshop did not touch that image... :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: HalfFull on March 08, 2024, 12:28

If I remember correctly I started with Fotolia/Adobe sometime around 2013/14. I used to upload a lot to begin with but I've learned volume isn't necessarily king. Quality, quality, quality is my mantra now so I try to avoid volume for the sake of it. I'd rather submit 10 good images a month than 100 average. I love what I do so I feel very lucky in that sense!
Are you not afraid to be featured on top sellers list by uploading only best images that will sell? After copycats, I started to delude my portfolio.

Not really, although I prefer to sail under the radar and never share or preview anything I do. I try to stay dark.

@halffull - at a rank of 79 (or even hovering around 100), what approximate # of downloads is that per week?

Just taken a look at that time. Daily figures then ranged between 220 - 320 a day... about 1700 for that week. If I achieve that again I'd be very happy. I'm a realist though, 100's is a good high!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 08, 2024, 13:07
A little better, but still slow for the season

currently 4060 files

pos 3760, 126dl so far, 92 usd

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on March 08, 2024, 16:42
Highest position = 97 79 (last 12 months), annual low of around 900 and currently 337 but improving still. A steady avg of around 400. Lifetime Rank 494. 20k images sole trader.

That is worth quoting for the turn of the page.  8) 400 is a very nice number.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 08, 2024, 17:45
No hope here.  Down 150 spots in 2 days.  Lowest rank in a few weeks.  Maybe stock photo is not for me.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on March 08, 2024, 17:58
No hope here.  Down 150 spots in 2 days.  Lowest rank in a few weeks.  Maybe stock photo is not for me.

It's been a slower week I think and probably slower for many other contributors too. But you're making over $200 per week just from images alone which is really good in my view. Well done! You'd easily more than double that if you had videos.

Personally my most important metric is the sum of all $$$ (not downloads) at the end of the month from the agencies I contribute to. I would never be able to compete on volume (even against myself) which is why I pivoted my focus to video with generally higher earnings per download.   
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 08, 2024, 18:27
No hope here.  Down 150 spots in 2 days.  Lowest rank in a few weeks.  Maybe stock photo is not for me.

It's been a slower week I think and probably slower for many other contributors too. But you're making over $200 per week just from images alone which is really good in my view. Well done! You'd easily more than double that if you had videos.

Personally my most important metric is the sum of all $$$ (not downloads) at the end of the month from the agencies I contribute to. I would never be able to compete on volume (even against myself) which is why I pivoted my focus to video with generally higher earnings per download.   

I had like 7,000 video clips on Adobe Stock, but deleted all due to cheap video sub sales becoming 80% of sales and RPD for video collapsing to ridiculous level.  I'm happy with Pond5 Exclusive and get 60% of price I set by myself.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 08, 2024, 18:46
No hope here.  Down 150 spots in 2 days.  Lowest rank in a few weeks.  Maybe stock photo is not for me.

It's been a slower week I think and probably slower for many other contributors too. But you're making over $200 per week just from images alone which is really good in my view. Well done! You'd easily more than double that if you had videos.

Personally my most important metric is the sum of all $$$ (not downloads) at the end of the month from the agencies I contribute to. I would never be able to compete on volume (even against myself) which is why I pivoted my focus to video with generally higher earnings per download.   

My download number and sales $$ is higher than last week, but ranking is much lower this week.  It's weird.  Must be many people doing well this week.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on March 08, 2024, 20:16
No hope here.  Down 150 spots in 2 days.  Lowest rank in a few weeks.  Maybe stock photo is not for me.

It's been a slower week I think and probably slower for many other contributors too. But you're making over $200 per week just from images alone which is really good in my view. Well done! You'd easily more than double that if you had videos.

Personally my most important metric is the sum of all $$$ (not downloads) at the end of the month from the agencies I contribute to. I would never be able to compete on volume (even against myself) which is why I pivoted my focus to video with generally higher earnings per download.   

My download number and sales $$ is higher than last week, but ranking is much lower this week.  It's weird.  Must be many people doing well this week.

It is a bit strange. My downloads are down this week by -20%. Sale $$$ are down -52%. Yet the damage to the ranking despite these lower results is just -0.5%.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: pancaketom on March 08, 2024, 21:15
remember the ranking has nothing to do with $, only download numbers, and it seems to be compared to everyone else, so you need a lot less downloads in a low week - say xmas to new year - than you would on a good week to get the same rank.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 09, 2024, 11:11
very, very slowly clawing my way back up. spring is starting to sell.

pos 3520, 4072 files

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 09, 2024, 19:21
255 dl 1430 rank
Pretty much the same downloads, earnings and position this week as a previous one, but not nearly as good as in January and early February. I had a Valentine best seller that dried up, Easter sold about only 10 times so far
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 09, 2024, 20:56
We rely so much on individual bestsellers. It is fun to see them blow up fast, but depressing when it goes back down.

Trying to diversify my content for better balance.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: PigsInSpace on March 09, 2024, 22:20
We rely so much on individual bestsellers. It is fun to see them blow up fast, but depressing when it goes back down.

Trying to diversify my content for better balance.

My number one image sells 1,000% more often than my second most popular image. If I wasn’t looking right at the stats I wouldn’t believe it. I’m always a little worried the algorithm will change and my sales will go way down.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 11, 2024, 07:23
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Sebastian Radu on March 11, 2024, 07:53
Hi,

I don't know what happened but in the last 10 - 14 days sales have dropped drastically. Is it just me? And my rank has fallen sharply..

 :-\
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 11, 2024, 08:31
Hi,

I don't know what happened but in the last 10 - 14 days sales have dropped drastically. Is it just me? And my rank has fallen sharply..

 :-\

I don't see that.  How many photos do you have?  Are your bestsellers seasonal?  Maybe there are massive amount of AI food photos added to Adobe Stock recently.  I was generating a few food photos too although not approved yet.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 11, 2024, 08:42
Last week haven't sold anything. Now I'm uploading again around 500 files, including some videos. Have around 3k files including 500 videos.

Thinking maybe to start trying Ai images.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Sebastian Radu on March 11, 2024, 09:04
Hi,

I don't know what happened but in the last 10 - 14 days sales have dropped drastically. Is it just me? And my rank has fallen sharply..

 :-\

I don't see that.  How many photos do you have?  Are your bestsellers seasonal?  Maybe there are massive amount of AI food photos added to Adobe Stock recently.  I was generating a few food photos too although not approved yet.

I have more than 10k of which about 4k are AI.
It's very strange because sales have dropped sharply, as if someone "put me on pause"...
I will try to generate new content and not food and see what happens.
I don't have many seasonal images.
Thanks anyway for your reply.
 :)


Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 11, 2024, 09:08
I can also confirm the decline. I haven't much sales that before (around 15 sells / ~ 10 USD a week) but now been fallen behind (to 5 to 7 sells / ~ 4 - 5 USD) with a port of approx 1,300 AI images. Currently I try to reset the port and deleted all portraits (approx 500 images) and starting reuploading them with much better quality (AI upscaler). Gonna also try different keywords.

What I have noticed is that AI generated food and some niche content are much better selling than people images. Gonna also try some product / poster mockups, interior shots and skin / facial care / product advertising motifs.



Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 11, 2024, 09:32
Hi,

I don't know what happened but in the last 10 - 14 days sales have dropped drastically. Is it just me? And my rank has fallen sharply..

 :-\

I don't see that.  How many photos do you have?  Are your bestsellers seasonal?  Maybe there are massive amount of AI food photos added to Adobe Stock recently.  I was generating a few food photos too although not approved yet.

I have more than 10k of which about 4k are AI.
It's very strange because sales have dropped sharply, as if someone "put me on pause"...
I will try to generate new content and not food and see what happens.
I don't have many seasonal images.
Thanks anyway for your reply.
 :)

No problem!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: yuriy on March 11, 2024, 11:26
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 11, 2024, 11:33
It is spring break in the US, if you have a lot of content for that market you will feel it.

You feel any public holiday and general vacation time.

Should pick back up next week and work will continue until the start of the summer holiday season.

During the day I even feel the German lunch break, from 12:30 - 2:30pm. Then the US starts getting in at around 3:30 my time, that drops off by around 10 pm my time.

etc…
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on March 11, 2024, 11:43
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.

I think he makes up for it with exclusive Pond5 sales. How's your Pond5 sales blvdone? You must be earning at least 1,000 to 2,000 each month with your ports?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 11, 2024, 11:47
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.

I think he makes up for it with exclusive Pond5 sales. How's your Pond5 sales blvdone? You must be earning at least 1,000 to 2,000 each month with your ports?

I sincerely hope that it is much, much more for him.

His port is huge and he sets high quality prices.

It should be a full time production income at least.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on March 11, 2024, 12:00
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.

I think he makes up for it with exclusive Pond5 sales. How's your Pond5 sales blvdone? You must be earning at least 1,000 to 2,000 each month with your ports?

I sincerely hope that it is much, much more for him.

His port is huge and he sets high quality prices.

It should be a full time production income at least.

I might be inspired to go Pond5 exclusive if blvdone could show his results given how he feels his performance is poor on Adobe, it would be an inspiration to get a glimpse on his Pond5 success strategy.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: yuriy on March 11, 2024, 12:10
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.

I think he makes up for it with exclusive Pond5 sales. How's your Pond5 sales blvdone? You must be earning at least 1,000 to 2,000 each month with your ports?

I sincerely hope that it is much, much more for him.

His port is huge and he sets high quality prices.

It should be a full time production income at least.

I might be inspired to go Pond5 exclusive if blvdone could show his results given how he feels his performance is poor on Adobe, it would be an inspiration to get a glimpse on his Pond5 success strategy.

all i've heard about p5 recently is sales have nosedived since the takeover.  i currently have $0 lifetime sales and have stopped uploading months ago.  i'd be surprised if it was different for exclusives though i'm sure a much larger port will still earn a few crumbs.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 11, 2024, 12:27
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.

Yeah, definitely I'm not an expert like you are.  I really suck despite doing stock videos since 2011.  I would love to learn from you!!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 11, 2024, 12:37
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.


I think he makes up for it with exclusive Pond5 sales. How's your Pond5 sales blvdone? You must be earning at least 1,000 to 2,000 each month with your ports?

I had a BME on Pond5 in October 2022.  That was after Shutterstock takeover.  I had most of my Pond5 bestsellers at the time as exclusive.  Last year was difficult due to the industry wide slow down since May.  But the way Adobe Stock video sales were going down rapidly due to cheap video subs just like how Shutterstock video sales went down after their video sub introduction, I made a decision to delete all videos from Adobe Stock and go all in Pond5 Exclusive.  That's instant 50% royalty increase for non-exclusive clips I had on Pond5.  So, it's very possible I still would've made more money last year if I didn't delete all my videos from Adobe Stock, but I was happy not seeing those $2.80 video sub sales on Adobe Stock.  Instead, my RPD on Pond5 is still above $50 probably.  This year so far has been bad on Pond5 to be honest.  It's getting more and more difficult.  But Adobe Stock started giving out 4k clips for the same price as HD on video subs now.  So, I think I made the right decision to delete my videos early to preserve value of my products.  Some Pond5 Exclusive contributors who set their prices really high are surprisingly doing well. 

Check out this thread I posted on Pond5.

https://www.pond5.com/community?thread=246291911&page=1 (https://www.pond5.com/community?thread=246291911&page=1)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 11, 2024, 12:41
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.

I think he makes up for it with exclusive Pond5 sales. How's your Pond5 sales blvdone? You must be earning at least 1,000 to 2,000 each month with your ports?

I sincerely hope that it is much, much more for him.

His port is huge and he sets high quality prices.

It should be a full time production income at least.

I might be inspired to go Pond5 exclusive if blvdone could show his results given how he feels his performance is poor on Adobe, it would be an inspiration to get a glimpse on his Pond5 success strategy.

But some do well on Pond5 while others don't for some reason.  So, my move isn't for everybody.  It takes time for new clips to start selling on Pond5 compared to Adobe Stock or Shutterstock.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: yuriy on March 11, 2024, 12:43
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.

Yeah, definitely I'm not an expert like you are.  I really suck despite doing stock videos since 2011.  I would love to learn from you!!!

you can sign up for my course, "i earned $10k a week doing stock for an hr in my spare time."  i'll PM you the link and a 10% off promo code, i'm sure it'll help.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 11, 2024, 13:07
Hi,

I don't know what happened but in the last 10 - 14 days sales have dropped drastically. Is it just me? And my rank has fallen sharply..

 :-\

I don't see that.  How many photos do you have?  Are your bestsellers seasonal?  Maybe there are massive amount of AI food photos added to Adobe Stock recently.  I was generating a few food photos too although not approved yet.

I have more than 10k of which about 4k are AI.
It's very strange because sales have dropped sharply, as if someone "put me on pause"...
I will try to generate new content and not food and see what happens.
I don't have many seasonal images.
Thanks anyway for your reply.
 :)

I have very similar 10k photos port with 4k AI and 6k real photos, but sales have been consistent this year.  I don't think it's an industry-wide problem.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 11, 2024, 18:41
again slowly rising

4120 files pos 3270
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on March 12, 2024, 01:57
Slow start this week.  I'm just not good at this.  I should quit.
10,000 photos now.  0 video.  I deleted 7,000 videos one by one for hours last May when RPD kept going down to ridiculous cheap price.

agreed, you're not very good at this.  i've never seen anyone recommend deleting content to increase sales so i'm not surprised it's not working for you.


I think he makes up for it with exclusive Pond5 sales. How's your Pond5 sales blvdone? You must be earning at least 1,000 to 2,000 each month with your ports?

I had a BME on Pond5 in October 2022.  That was after Shutterstock takeover.  I had most of my Pond5 bestsellers at the time as exclusive.  Last year was difficult due to the industry wide slow down since May.  But the way Adobe Stock video sales were going down rapidly due to cheap video subs just like how Shutterstock video sales went down after their video sub introduction, I made a decision to delete all videos from Adobe Stock and go all in Pond5 Exclusive.  That's instant 50% royalty increase for non-exclusive clips I had on Pond5.  So, it's very possible I still would've made more money last year if I didn't delete all my videos from Adobe Stock, but I was happy not seeing those $2.80 video sub sales on Adobe Stock.  Instead, my RPD on Pond5 is still above $50 probably.  This year so far has been bad on Pond5 to be honest.  It's getting more and more difficult.  But Adobe Stock started giving out 4k clips for the same price as HD on video subs now.  So, I think I made the right decision to delete my videos early to preserve value of my products.  Some Pond5 Exclusive contributors who set their prices really high are surprisingly doing well. 

Check out this thread I posted on Pond5.

https://www.pond5.com/community?thread=246291911&page=1 (https://www.pond5.com/community?thread=246291911&page=1)

I appreciate your honesty with your experiences and agree there is an industry wide slowdown - probably not surprising with global inflation and economies slowing etc. I've had a brief look at the thread you posted on Pond5 and will have a better read later.     
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 12, 2024, 07:24
Quote
I appreciate your honesty with your experiences and agree there is an industry wide slowdown - probably not surprising with global inflation and economies slowing etc. I've had a brief look at the thread you posted on Pond5 and will have a better read later.   

For clarity... it's actually massive theft of wealth through massive money printing under the guise of "saveukraine"/"convidpayments", etc... money printing (aka "inflation") is a way of "taxing" ppl without them reallly knowing it... if they make things 2x as expensive as before, they've essentially "stolen" 50% of people's wealth via money printing...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 12, 2024, 07:25
-----------------
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 12, 2024, 07:33
Quote
I appreciate your honesty with your experiences and agree there is an industry wide slowdown - probably not surprising with global inflation and economies slowing etc. I've had a brief look at the thread you posted on Pond5 and will have a better read later.   

For clarity... it's actually massive theft of wealth through massive money printing under the guise of "saveukraine"/"convidpayments", etc... money printing (aka "inflation") is a way of "taxing" ppl without them reallly knowing it... if they make things 2x as expensive as before, they've essentially "stolen" 50% of people's wealth via money printing...

Sure it is. It was always in history. Wealth inequality can only arise through robbery,  theft and exploitation. Today's financial system is completely decoupled from a productivity-influenced economy and has become nothing more than a financial casino.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 12, 2024, 07:47
Quote
I appreciate your honesty with your experiences and agree there is an industry wide slowdown - probably not surprising with global inflation and economies slowing etc. I've had a brief look at the thread you posted on Pond5 and will have a better read later.   

For clarity... it's actually massive theft of wealth through massive money printing under the guise of "saveukraine"/"convidpayments", etc... money printing (aka "inflation") is a way of "taxing" ppl without them reallly knowing it... if they make things 2x as expensive as before, they've essentially "stolen" 50% of people's wealth via money printing...

Sure it is. It was always in history. Wealth inequality can only arise through robbery,  theft and exploitation. Today's financial system is completely decoupled from a productivity-influenced economy and has become nothing more than a financial casino.

Most people don't "get" that.

What "does" have value is "assets" though.

That is why "they" are purchasing land, massive amounts of it.

But your "digital assets" also have value. It's up to you to decide what nominal value you assign to it.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 12, 2024, 10:09
Had a nice sales day yesterday and my ranking jumped above 1,200th.  Maybe I shouldn't quit stock photo.  Not making me a billionaire like it did for Jon Oringer, but helps me pay some bills.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 12, 2024, 11:24
Your port is great. Just double it.

And your sales will still keep growing as more and more customers find and bookmark you.

Adobe can generate an income of thousands of dollars a month even for single artists.

You understand the customers really well, so your success is well deserved.

With 20k files I wouldn't be surprised if you make over 2k a moth just from Adobe.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Zero Talent on March 12, 2024, 12:17
.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 12, 2024, 12:29
Your port is great. Just double it.

And your sales will still keep growing as more and more customers find and bookmark you.

Adobe can generate an income of thousands of dollars a month even for single artists.

You understand the customers really well, so your success is well deserved.

With 20k files I wouldn't be surprised if you make over 2k a moth just from Adobe.

Thanks!!  You're doing well for your 4k port size too!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 12, 2024, 22:17
1700 this week with 53 downloads per day (14 of various images, the rest is my one bestseller) and about 3k images
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 12, 2024, 22:41
that is great success for 3k files.

there are people with 20k ports that never reach that level.

i dropped today to 3410. but i sold two videos which added 50 dollars, so i am fine.

good to see videos pick up on adobe. it makes up for the slow sales on pond5.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 13, 2024, 10:39
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 13, 2024, 11:57
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.

A bit off topic, but may I ask what soft are you using to create Ai images? Thinking of adding some to my port too,
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 13, 2024, 12:23
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.

A bit off topic, but may I ask what soft are you using to create Ai images? Thinking of adding some to my port too,

Midjourney.  We have too many contributors uploading AI images now.  So please don’t start doing it!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: DaLiu on March 13, 2024, 12:31
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.

A bit off topic, but may I ask what soft are you using to create Ai images? Thinking of adding some to my port too,

Midjourney.  We have too many contributors uploading AI images now.  So please don’t start doing it!!

With so many people doing exclusive AI images since you don't need any expertise in the field, it's a good time to switch to a real photographer and try to find a niche which AI don't cover it or can't replicate it.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 13, 2024, 12:33
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.

A bit off topic, but may I ask what soft are you using to create Ai images? Thinking of adding some to my port too,

Midjourney.  We have too many contributors uploading AI images now.  So please don’t start doing it!!


Well, I still can give it a try anyway :). Nothing will stop me to try, it's just a learning curve. My main thing is still photography, but here in UK when the weather is rubbish, I still can create some images using Ai.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 13, 2024, 16:14
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.

A bit off topic, but may I ask what soft are you using to create Ai images? Thinking of adding some to my port too,

Midjourney.  We have too many contributors uploading AI images now.  So please don’t start doing it!!

Lol? With AI there are so many possibilities to create stuff, which is not yet there. One just need more imagination than copy pastas of bestsellers.
So you wouldn't even compete in this case.

I would advise to start with Stable Diffusion XL models and the AI upscaler (ControlNet, Tile Preprocessor, UltraSharp Upscaler).
It's more flexible and if you search a little bit longer much cheaper than Midjourney.

I'm currently playing with some portraits at the ocean cliffs during sunset. The skin texture looks more realistic than the of Midjourney's waxed ones.
https://ibb.co/xSzxMjD
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 13, 2024, 16:23
that is a beautiful portrait.

working from your own computer is not just cheaper, but also private!!

maybe during this year I can learn to install stable on my computer. I am just worried that my system is not strong enough, my computer is from 2019. Perhaps my graphic card and system are too old?

fwiw I moved up in the weekly rank again, now pos 3140 with 4160 files. better, but still much slower than I was hoping for. But a good mix of sales, including old photos.

uploading attachments via my tablet/safari not working. currently only works on the computer.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 13, 2024, 16:41
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.

A bit off topic, but may I ask what soft are you using to create Ai images? Thinking of adding some to my port too,

Midjourney.  We have too many contributors uploading AI images now.  So please don’t start doing it!!

Lol? With AI there are so many possibilities to create stuff, which is not yet there. One just need more imagination than copy pastas of bestsellers.
So you wouldn't even compete in this case.

I would advise to start with Stable Diffusion XL models and the AI upscaler (ControlNet, Tile Preprocessor, UltraSharp Upscaler).
It's more flexible and if you search a little bit longer much cheaper than Midjourney.

I'm currently playing with some portraits at the ocean cliffs during sunset. The skin texture looks more realistic than the of Midjourney's waxed ones.
https://ibb.co/xSzxMjD

Thanks a lot. Is that a soft to install on my laptop to generate Ai images? Can these be uploaded on Stock sites afterwards ?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 14, 2024, 01:10
Cobalt, you are so kind. Thank you. Glad to read that your videos selling well!

Faustvasea, don’t think it will work on the laptop, not enough memory. I would suggest Midjourney or Firefly. Both turn key, however, don’t expect to generate something worth uploading right away - there is a learning curve for quality that sells. Plus from what I’ve read so far, images that do sell usually go through post production.
The best thing is no limit to try recreate your ideas! I love it. If my photography was selling as well as my AI, I would stick with photography.

my computer is a work station with dual processor Zion 64gb Ram Nvidia 4070 graphics card with 24 gb of video memory
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 14, 2024, 01:28
Cobalt, you are so kind. Thank you. Glad to read that your videos selling well!

Faustvasea, don’t think it will work on the laptop, not enough memory. I would suggest Midjourney or Firefly. Both turn key, however, don’t expect to generate something worth uploading right away - there is a learning curve for quality that sells. Plus from what I’ve read so far, images that do sell usually go through post production.
The best thing is no limit to try recreate your ideas! I love it. If my photography was selling as well as my AI, I would stick with photography.

Thanks. I was looking at midjourney, but seems a bit expensive. I haven't seen any prices for firefly. I'm sure I can learn to generate Ai images. I still prefer normal photography, as I'm using my gear and love walking around.

So basically even Ai images need to be edited?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 14, 2024, 03:06
In my opinion, all AI images need to be edited, at times quite heavy. I use Photoshop  with healing brush then Lightroom. Most of the images are too small, so you’ll have to upscale them with Topaz or Photoshop. For me, it takes faster to edit my photos, but I don’t take enough of photos to make a difference in stock.
I pay $60 per month for MJ with stealth option, through still I cough some of my files out in search. 
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 14, 2024, 04:21
In my opinion, all AI images need to be edited, at times quite heavy. I use Photoshop  with healing brush then Lightroom. Most of the images are too small, so you’ll have to upscale them with Topaz or Photoshop. For me, it takes faster to edit my photos, but I don’t take enough of photos to make a difference in stock.
I pay $60 per month for MJ with stealth option, through still I cough some of my files out in search.

I already have couple of Topaz Softwares, including Ai Videos, Photos. And Upscale.

Is that worth investing $60 a month?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 14, 2024, 05:18
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.

A bit off topic, but may I ask what soft are you using to create Ai images? Thinking of adding some to my port too,

Midjourney.  We have too many contributors uploading AI images now.  So please don’t start doing it!!

Lol? With AI there are so many possibilities to create stuff, which is not yet there. One just need more imagination than copy pastas of bestsellers.
So you wouldn't even compete in this case.

I would advise to start with Stable Diffusion XL models and the AI upscaler (ControlNet, Tile Preprocessor, UltraSharp Upscaler).
It's more flexible and if you search a little bit longer much cheaper than Midjourney.

I'm currently playing with some portraits at the ocean cliffs during sunset. The skin texture looks more realistic than the of Midjourney's waxed ones.
https://ibb.co/xSzxMjD

Thanks a lot. Is that a soft to install on my laptop to generate Ai images? Can these be uploaded on Stock sites afterwards ?

You can either install local web GUI like AUTOMATIC1111 for Stable Diffusion and run it on your own computer if you have a good graphic card or you can use online machines (runpod, mage.space, etc.). The same applies to AI upscaler.

@cobalt
Thank you!

In my opinion, all AI images need to be edited, at times quite heavy. I use Photoshop  with healing brush then Lightroom. Most of the images are too small, so you’ll have to upscale them with Topaz or Photoshop. For me, it takes faster to edit my photos, but I don’t take enough of photos to make a difference in stock.
I pay $60 per month for MJ with stealth option, through still I cough some of my files out in search. 

In my opinion, all AI images need to be edited, at times quite heavy. I use Photoshop  with healing brush then Lightroom. Most of the images are too small, so you’ll have to upscale them with Topaz or Photoshop. For me, it takes faster to edit my photos, but I don’t take enough of photos to make a difference in stock.
I pay $60 per month for MJ with stealth option, through still I cough some of my files out in search.

I already have couple of Topaz Softwares, including Ai Videos, Photos. And Upscale.

Is that worth investing $60 a month?

60 Bucks a month is not worth it if you don't generate ten thousand of images every month. It will take months to probably a year until you will earn the same amount on Adobe Stock, so it's a non profit or even loss business case.

Topaz Upscale is o.k. I use it for 2 x upscale after AI 2 x upscale since using 4 x AI upscaler is very time consuming and therefore expensive.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 14, 2024, 05:33
Sales was slow yesterday, but still holding good ranking somehow.  I want to be above 1,000th when I finish creating/adding another 4,000 AI photos sometime this year, I hope.  I'm running out of my ideas for AI photos now to be honest.  It's not as fast pace as it was in my first few months of AI photo generation.

A bit off topic, but may I ask what soft are you using to create Ai images? Thinking of adding some to my port too,

Midjourney.  We have too many contributors uploading AI images now.  So please don’t start doing it!!

Lol? With AI there are so many possibilities to create stuff, which is not yet there. One just need more imagination than copy pastas of bestsellers.
So you wouldn't even compete in this case.

I would advise to start with Stable Diffusion XL models and the AI upscaler (ControlNet, Tile Preprocessor, UltraSharp Upscaler).
It's more flexible and if you search a little bit longer much cheaper than Midjourney.

I'm currently playing with some portraits at the ocean cliffs during sunset. The skin texture looks more realistic than the of Midjourney's waxed ones.
https://ibb.co/xSzxMjD

Thanks a lot. Is that a soft to install on my laptop to generate Ai images? Can these be uploaded on Stock sites afterwards ?

You can either install local web GUI like AUTOMATIC1111 for Stable Diffusion and run it on your own computer if you have a good graphic card or you can use online machines (runpod, mage.space, etc.). The same applies to AI upscaler.

@cobalt
Thank you!

In my opinion, all AI images need to be edited, at times quite heavy. I use Photoshop  with healing brush then Lightroom. Most of the images are too small, so you’ll have to upscale them with Topaz or Photoshop. For me, it takes faster to edit my photos, but I don’t take enough of photos to make a difference in stock.
I pay $60 per month for MJ with stealth option, through still I cough some of my files out in search. 

In my opinion, all AI images need to be edited, at times quite heavy. I use Photoshop  with healing brush then Lightroom. Most of the images are too small, so you’ll have to upscale them with Topaz or Photoshop. For me, it takes faster to edit my photos, but I don’t take enough of photos to make a difference in stock.
I pay $60 per month for MJ with stealth option, through still I cough some of my files out in search.

I already have couple of Topaz Softwares, including Ai Videos, Photos. And Upscale.

Is that worth investing $60 a month?

60 Bucks a month is not worth it if you don't generate ten thousand of images every month. It will take months to probably a year until you will earn the same amount on Adobe Stock, so it's a non profit or even loss business case.

Topaz Upscale is o.k. I use it for 2 x upscale after AI 2 x upscale since using 4 x AI upscaler is very time consuming and therefore expensive.

Thanks for advice, I definetly not gonna do 10 000 images a months due of my full time job.

In terms of the software, I have a MacBook PRO M2 MAX 2023 1TB SSD and 32GB Ram, is that will be alright ? Mainy purchased for video editing.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 14, 2024, 06:19
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY)
Would be o.k. but not optimal. RTX Nvidia GUPUs are currently the best solution but are quite expensive. I would try mage.space for 15 bucks / month.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 14, 2024, 07:46
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY)
Would be o.k. but not optimal. RTX Nvidia GUPUs are currently the best solution but are quite expensive. I would try mage.space for 15 bucks / month.

Might give it a try first. Are there any other cheap options for generating Ai images?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 14, 2024, 08:02
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY)
Would be o.k. but not optimal. RTX Nvidia GUPUs are currently the best solution but are quite expensive. I would try mage.space for 15 bucks / month.

Might give it a try first. Are there any other cheap options for generating Ai images?

Ok, for the first step in learning prompting and getting a better understanding / feel for how prompting parameters affect your images, I would try the following online generators (currently free):
https://clipdrop.co/stable-diffusion-turbo (https://clipdrop.co/stable-diffusion-turbo) (daily limited with watermark and 1:1 aspect ratio but very fast)
https://playground.com/ (https://playground.com/) (100 images free per day)
https://sdxlturbo.ai/ (https://sdxlturbo.ai/) (watermark)
https://civitai.com/ (https://civitai.com/) (probably also daily limited)

You can also use mage.space with limitation to the original SDXL model and max. 30 generation steps for free (what I would recommend to begin with).


Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 14, 2024, 08:26
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY)
Would be o.k. but not optimal. RTX Nvidia GUPUs are currently the best solution but are quite expensive. I would try mage.space for 15 bucks / month.

Might give it a try first. Are there any other cheap options for generating Ai images?

Ok, for the first step in learning prompting and getting a better understanding / feel for how prompting parameters affect your images, I would try the following online generators (currently free):
https://clipdrop.co/stable-diffusion-turbo (https://clipdrop.co/stable-diffusion-turbo) (daily limited with watermark and 1:1 aspect ratio but very fast)
https://playground.com/ (https://playground.com/) (100 images free per day)
https://sdxlturbo.ai/ (https://sdxlturbo.ai/) (watermark)
https://civitai.com/ (https://civitai.com/) (probably also daily limited)

You can also use mage.space with limitation to the original SDXL model and max. 30 generation steps for free (what I would recommend to begin with).

Thanks, and after I'm confident, which paid solution you'd recommend to generate Ai, for stock purposes.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 14, 2024, 23:31
now 2890

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 15, 2024, 06:04
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY)
Would be o.k. but not optimal. RTX Nvidia GUPUs are currently the best solution but are quite expensive. I would try mage.space for 15 bucks / month.

Might give it a try first. Are there any other cheap options for generating Ai images?

Ok, for the first step in learning prompting and getting a better understanding / feel for how prompting parameters affect your images, I would try the following online generators (currently free):
https://clipdrop.co/stable-diffusion-turbo (https://clipdrop.co/stable-diffusion-turbo) (daily limited with watermark and 1:1 aspect ratio but very fast)
https://playground.com/ (https://playground.com/) (100 images free per day)
https://sdxlturbo.ai/ (https://sdxlturbo.ai/) (watermark)
https://civitai.com/ (https://civitai.com/) (probably also daily limited)

You can also use mage.space with limitation to the original SDXL model and max. 30 generation steps for free (what I would recommend to begin with).

Thanks, and after I'm confident, which paid solution you'd recommend to generate Ai, for stock purposes.

I would then still recommend the basic or pro plan on mage.space when you are more familiar and skilled with promting.

https://www.mage.space/membership (https://www.mage.space/membership)

I mean 8 bucks / month without generation limits, private mode and over 160 Stable Diffusion calibrated models is extremely cheap.

I'm currently using the pro plan because I often need the 100 generation steps for very detailed images. Also I'm generating 4 images parallel or using the scale up fix while generating other content.

When I will hit the 30 USD / month mark on Adobe I will switch to Pro+ Plan, since you then can install all models from civitai.
There are some finetuned models there, which could be used for even a better generating quality. But currently it would be a loss business case for me, so that I'm waiting for growing earnings.

@cobalt
Nice! Keep it up!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 15, 2024, 06:14
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cB07h-odLTY)
Would be o.k. but not optimal. RTX Nvidia GUPUs are currently the best solution but are quite expensive. I would try mage.space for 15 bucks / month.

Might give it a try first. Are there any other cheap options for generating Ai images?

Ok, for the first step in learning prompting and getting a better understanding / feel for how prompting parameters affect your images, I would try the following online generators (currently free):
https://clipdrop.co/stable-diffusion-turbo (https://clipdrop.co/stable-diffusion-turbo) (daily limited with watermark and 1:1 aspect ratio but very fast)
https://playground.com/ (https://playground.com/) (100 images free per day)
https://sdxlturbo.ai/ (https://sdxlturbo.ai/) (watermark)
https://civitai.com/ (https://civitai.com/) (probably also daily limited)

You can also use mage.space with limitation to the original SDXL model and max. 30 generation steps for free (what I would recommend to begin with).

Thanks, and after I'm confident, which paid solution you'd recommend to generate Ai, for stock purposes.

I would then still recommend the basic or pro plan on mage.space when you are more familiar and skilled with promting.

https://www.mage.space/membership (https://www.mage.space/membership)

I mean 8 bucks / month without generation limits, private mode and over 160 Stable Diffusion calibrated models is extremely cheap.

I'm currently using the pro plan because I often need the 100 generation steps for very detailed images. Also I'm generating 4 images parallel or using the scale up fix while generating other content.

When I will hit the 30 USD / month mark on Adobe I will switch to Pro+ Plan, since you then can install all models from civitai.
There are some finetuned models there, which could be used for even a better generating quality. But currently it would be a loss business case for me, so that I'm waiting for growing earnings.

@cobalt
Nice! Keep it up!

Thanks a lot. for 8$ a month, is really cheap.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 15, 2024, 06:31
now 2890

RPD $1 not bad!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 15, 2024, 08:58
I had a video sale, usually the rpd is around 70-85 cents.

@Andrej

that looks like a great offer for stable diffusion. Will absolutely try that. Then I don‘t need to upgrade my computer.  Thank you!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 15, 2024, 10:25
Another slow day yesterday, but somehow my ranking is holding steady.  Must be a slow week for everybody.  I only had 1 good sales day this week.  In general, day to day sales are not consistent.  10,000 photos, 0 video portfolio.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 15, 2024, 11:56
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.

yes rank is number of downloads,the most important thing,not earnings.

in my opinion the most important thing is the number of sales,earnings can go up or down,but the number of downloads cannot go down,that is the most important number,then comes the money. :)

by the way,my best rank ever is 3210.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: pancaketom on March 15, 2024, 12:43
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.

yes rank is number of downloads,the most important thing,not earnings.

in my opinion the most important thing is the number of sales,earnings can go up or down,but the number of downloads cannot go down,that is the most important number,then comes the money. :)

by the way,my best rank ever is 3210.

If you don't think sales can go down in this business, you are either really good, really fortunate, or haven't been at this long.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 15, 2024, 12:59
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.

yes rank is number of downloads,the most important thing,not earnings.

in my opinion the most important thing is the number of sales,earnings can go up or down,but the number of downloads cannot go down,that is the most important number,then comes the money. :)

by the way,my best rank ever is 3210.

Doesn't make any sense. If Adobe will lower the commissions you will get less earnings even if you have the same ranking. So earnings are the most important figure.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 15, 2024, 14:51

When I will hit the 30 USD / month mark on Adobe I will switch to Pro+ Plan, since you then can install all models from civitai.
There are some finetuned models there, which could be used for even a better generating quality. But currently it would be a loss business case for me, so that I'm waiting for growing earnings.
do you mean $30 usd payment to Adobe Photoshop Lightroom or $30 usd per day from Adobe stock?

I’m not familiar with Stable Diffusionat all, what are “ finetuned models mean? Can it generate good quality AND big sizes without upscaling to delude the original quality?

Thanks in advance
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 15, 2024, 14:55

Doesn't make any sense. If Adobe will lower the commissions you will get less earnings even if you have the same ranking. So earnings are the most important figure.

It depends for whom: for us earnings are most important, but for Adobe it’s downloads- it shows that your content is popular with customers, so Adobe will push that content to customers even more.
I wonder if @Matt can clarify that for us please?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 15, 2024, 15:01
Another slow day yesterday, but somehow my ranking is holding steady.  Must be a slow week for everybody.  I only had 1 good sales day this week.  In general, day to day sales are not consistent.  10,000 photos, 0 video portfolio.
strange week, a bit slower than last week, but my weekly standing is ar 2020  now, way worse than last week. (Still under 3000 files, 28 pages )
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 15, 2024, 15:22

When I will hit the 30 USD / month mark on Adobe I will switch to Pro+ Plan, since you then can install all models from civitai.
There are some finetuned models there, which could be used for even a better generating quality. But currently it would be a loss business case for me, so that I'm waiting for growing earnings.
do you mean $30 usd payment to Adobe Photoshop Lightroom or $30 usd per day from Adobe stock?

I’m not familiar with Stable Diffusionat all, what are “ finetuned models mean? Can it generate good quality AND big sizes without upscaling to delude the original quality?

Thanks in advance

Nah I mean, when I will earn more than 30 USD / month on Adobe Stock. Currently I'm pending around 20 to 30 but I'm not AI spamming anymore and focus more on quality.

Diffusion Stable has a huge fan community, which calibrate own base models and finetuned models (LoRas).
https://civitai.com/models?tag=base+model

LoRas focus on very specialized content like special kind of buildings, for example offices or shopping malls:
https://civitai.com/models/229533/jjs-architecture-office-building
https://civitai.com/models/262849/jjs-interior-space-shopping-mall

and many more.

It's kinda very cool because the community offers endless possibilities for free. Some offer really good quality with very few generation errors.
It will take just a matter of time when all agency's will integrate similar finetuned models in their own AI image generators.

I believe the generated resolution is limited in Stable Diffusion to max. 2mpx. The problem is the calibration of such models since you would need an extrem huge amount of Nivida GPUs for bigger resolutions, which is extremely expensive.
So you have to upscale on your own afterwards.


Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 15, 2024, 16:14
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.

yes rank is number of downloads,the most important thing,not earnings.

in my opinion the most important thing is the number of sales,earnings can go up or down,but the number of downloads cannot go down,that is the most important number,then comes the money. :)

by the way,my best rank ever is 3210.

If you don't think sales can go down in this business, you are either really good, really fortunate, or haven't been at this long.

absolutely yes,sales can go down that's the problem,that's why I prefer Adobe,because with all the other agencies everything is too unstable.

I don't know what your experience is with Adobe,but mine has been a constant increase for 6 years now,very slow,in fact sometimes too slow perhaps,but at least it continues to increase.

this year for example I am in the order of 40-50% more every month compared to last year,which wouldn't be bad if I already earned 2000 usd a month,50% 1000usd would be excellent! :)

unfortunately this is not the case,so a 50% increase after a year of incessant uploads I define as OK,nothing exceptional,but at least OK.

one of the things I like about Adobe is precisely this:certainties,when the minimum monthly number of sales threshold is set you don't go lower than that.

example:once you reach the minimum of 100 sales per month you never go down from that,first maybe you start to get there every now and then and then at a certain point 100 sales becomes the minimum.

with Istock I made a year in which I earned thousands of dollars,a lot,and then the following year it was rubbish,really rubbish,you can't build a business this way,I prefer the progressive and stable climb :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 15, 2024, 16:24
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.

yes rank is number of downloads,the most important thing,not earnings.

in my opinion the most important thing is the number of sales,earnings can go up or down,but the number of downloads cannot go down,that is the most important number,then comes the money. :)

by the way,my best rank ever is 3210.

Doesn't make any sense. If Adobe will lower the commissions you will get less earnings even if you have the same ranking. So earnings are the most important figure.

Adobe does not lower royalty rates,and even if it were,we know that we can make better and lower sales,but the number of sales is always more important,when there are many sales the money comes.

in any case,if Adobe also starts making sales of 10 or 20c I will abandon microstock.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 15, 2024, 17:58
@Andrei S you’ll get there with quality.
When I found this forum and read that majority of AI contributors upload hundreds or thousands of AI images per week, I panicked and started to upload more as well. It didn’t bring more $ at all. It was just busy work.  Now I slowed back and refocused on quality again. The quality images might get selected to be featured. If you can produce something original and highly usable, that can’t be found on Adobe search, this is what brings sales for me usually. (Unfortunately then copycats get them and it does get diluted somewhat)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 15, 2024, 23:56
you don‘t need thousands of images. You don‘t even need the absolute best quality.

the most important is to really dig into the collections of several agencies and look for something that is needed but does not exist. then you can have a bestseller or a reliable seller for a long time,

it is also possibel to do this with slight twist to a popular concept.

most people just sort various searches by downlods, pick the top ten files from most agencies and try to copy them exactly,

that is why you have so many duplicates in all collections.

pick a subject that you understand well, from your day job, a lifelong hobby or interest and then dig in and see what is missing,

obviously if you find what is missing and have top quality that would be best.

the other factor is time.

a lot of my content needs 18 months to really start selling. yes there are customers who buy instantly, but many just lightbox files for future projects.

become a resource

if you have at least 1000 files about a theme and collected them in a gallery, chances are customers start bookmarking this and keep checking back if you have something new. they might also add more of your content

you also start to see more downloads of several files or a complete series.

you will get there.

I am trying to upload more volume, but I find it very hard.


down to 3070


Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 08:13
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea. 
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 08:28
you don‘t need thousands of images. You don‘t even need the absolute best quality.

the most important is to really dig into the collections of several agencies and look for something that is needed but does not exist. then you can have a bestseller or a reliable seller for a long time,

it is also possibel to do this with slight twist to a popular concept.

most people just sort various searches by downlods, pick the top ten files from most agencies and try to copy them exactly,

that is why you have so many duplicates in all collections.

pick a subject that you understand well, from your day job, a lifelong hobby or interest and then dig in and see what is missing,

obviously if you find what is missing and have top quality that would be best.

the other factor is time.

a lot of my content needs 18 months to really start selling. yes there are customers who buy instantly, but many just lightbox files for future projects.

become a resource

if you have at least 1000 files about a theme and collected them in a gallery, chances are customers start bookmarking this and keep checking back if you have something new. they might also add more of your content

you also start to see more downloads of several files or a complete series.

you will get there.

I am trying to upload more volume, but I find it very hard.


down to 3070

Good advice!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 08:30
@Andrei S you’ll get there with quality.
When I found this forum and read that majority of AI contributors upload hundreds or thousands of AI images per week, I panicked and started to upload more as well. It didn’t bring more $ at all. It was just busy work.  Now I slowed back and refocused on quality again. The quality images might get selected to be featured. If you can produce something original and highly usable, that can’t be found on Adobe search, this is what brings sales for me usually. (Unfortunately then copycats get them and it does get diluted somewhat)

Yes, quality matters.  Quality x quantity is great.  Quantity x no quality is bad.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 08:34
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.

yes rank is number of downloads,the most important thing,not earnings.

in my opinion the most important thing is the number of sales,earnings can go up or down,but the number of downloads cannot go down,that is the most important number,then comes the money. :)

by the way,my best rank ever is 3210.

Doesn't make any sense. If Adobe will lower the commissions you will get less earnings even if you have the same ranking. So earnings are the most important figure.

Adobe does not lower royalty rates,and even if it were,we know that we can make better and lower sales,but the number of sales is always more important,when there are many sales the money comes.

in any case,if Adobe also starts making sales of 10 or 20c I will abandon microstock.

Yup.  If Adobe Stock becomes like Shutterstock 0.10, 0.10, 0.10, 0.10, 0.10, 0.10, it's game over.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 08:41
At the moment I keep bouncing between 3100 and 5200. 4000 files.

Hope to move further up again soon, this is frustrating. But for a port this size it is probably ok.

I hate to ask, because someone will think the rank numbers actually matter.

But, why do you hope to move further up? Rank means nothing, except for your own personal information, how you are doing, compared to others. If you are making money, and happy with what you do and earn, it doesn't matter what some irrelevant number says.

My rank goes up during the holiday season, down in January, back up in April. My earnings, as in money that goes into the bank, is all that counts.

Rank is apparently, number of downloads, not earnings.

yes rank is number of downloads,the most important thing,not earnings.

in my opinion the most important thing is the number of sales,earnings can go up or down,but the number of downloads cannot go down,that is the most important number,then comes the money. :)

by the way,my best rank ever is 3210.

If you don't think sales can go down in this business, you are either really good, really fortunate, or haven't been at this long.

Yup.  Shutterstock photo sales have gone 1/6-10 of pre-$0.10 days in 4 years.  That was a genius move by whoever came up with that idea.  It's nice to see the lowest commission per photo sale on Shutterstock was $0.38 before the destruction.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 16, 2024, 09:43
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 10:10
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 16, 2024, 10:33
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

Dam*, sounds like you've sold your soul.
#MicrostockLife
#GetRichOrDieCryin'
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 11:45
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

Dam*, sounds like you've sold your soul.
#MicrostockLife
#GetRichOrDieCryin'

 ;D ;D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 16, 2024, 15:24
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 16:04
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 16, 2024, 16:25
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.

yes of course,that's why I asked! :D

Do you have an approval rate on reviewed content?mine is about 85%,of content accepted out of the total reviewed,but I dedicate time to every single piece of AI content.

ok when I have time I will try to read everything... I never have time for anything,I'm always making content,my girlfriend is pissed off like a beast! :D (I am joking she’s cute and nice  :) ) (when she’s not pissed off  :D )
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 16, 2024, 16:45
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.

I haven't seen. I know you were joking.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 16, 2024, 16:47
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.

yes of course,that's why I asked! :D

Do you have an approval rate on reviewed content?mine is about 85%,of content accepted out of the total reviewed,but I dedicate time to every single piece of AI content.

ok when I have time I will try to read everything... I never have time for anything,I'm always making content,my girlfriend is pissed off like a beast! :D

Lol, I've got a 2 year old ill daughter, who is pissed of like a beast all the time and I find time to generate and other stuff. Just take your mobile phone, take some notes of content, which you want to generate and hit then every time when you got 2 minutes of free mode (making coffee, shi*ting in the bathroom, cooking, cleaning the house, etc.. ) just hit the generate button.

You commute 30 minutes or 1 hour to work?
Wonderful, just hit the button.

Also there is night time, which is for example part of my "me time".
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 16, 2024, 17:19
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.

yes of course,that's why I asked! :D

Do you have an approval rate on reviewed content?mine is about 85%,of content accepted out of the total reviewed,but I dedicate time to every single piece of AI content.

ok when I have time I will try to read everything... I never have time for anything,I'm always making content,my girlfriend is pissed off like a beast! :D

I don't think there's a limit for upload.  I usually upload average of 50-200 AI images at a time per day when I upload.  I don't upload everyday.  Overall AI image approval rate for this year probably is 70% or so.  I only use photo editing software for AI images if I need to remove brand logo.  So, 99% of the time, I just upscale, convert to jpeg and upload.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 16, 2024, 18:22
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.

yes of course,that's why I asked! :D

Do you have an approval rate on reviewed content?mine is about 85%,of content accepted out of the total reviewed,but I dedicate time to every single piece of AI content.

ok when I have time I will try to read everything... I never have time for anything,I'm always making content,my girlfriend is pissed off like a beast! :D

I don't think there's a limit for upload.  I usually upload average of 50-200 AI images at a time per day when I upload.  I don't upload everyday.  Overall AI image approval rate for this year probably is 70% or so.  I only use photo editing software for AI images if I need to remove brand logo.  So, 99% of the time, I just upscale, convert to jpeg and upload.

in fact there is no limit,and this unfortunately slows down the review process a lot,as far as I know,it's not possible for reviewers to know who sent what,so it's not possible to quantify how much you're sending for reviewers.

so only upscale then convert to jpeg index and send?and don't you think that the content you send will be easily surpassed over time by content on which someone has spent more time?

in any case this is also a strategy,you go more on quantity for AI content,ok,I believe that it is not the best strategy over time,I believe that 100 contents in which you have lost at least a week are better than 1000 contents in a week.

if you want advice from someone who certainly knows less than you,because I'm sure you have more experience than me,I would advise you at this point to slow down,and focus more on quality,because you already have thousands of contents for sale,if you continue in the same way you just continue to do what you have already done! :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: synthetick on March 16, 2024, 21:31
Everyone on Adobe has an upload limit (a limit on the numbers of items in review at any one time). Newcomers are limited to 50 and this increases as they get acceptances and downloads. The maximum I have heard of is 3000. Adobe does not disclose how the upload limit is calculated.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 17, 2024, 01:17
Everyone on Adobe has an upload limit (a limit on the numbers of items in review at any one time). Newcomers are limited to 50 and this increases as they get acceptances and downloads. The maximum I have heard of is 3000. Adobe does not disclose how the upload limit is calculated.

we were referring to a specific limit for AI content.
I knew about the limit of 50 for new ones but I didn't know there was a limit of up to 3000.

I have never reached any limit  :) at least not when it comes to uploads!  :D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 17, 2024, 07:10
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.

yes of course,that's why I asked! :D

Do you have an approval rate on reviewed content?mine is about 85%,of content accepted out of the total reviewed,but I dedicate time to every single piece of AI content.

ok when I have time I will try to read everything... I never have time for anything,I'm always making content,my girlfriend is pissed off like a beast! :D

I don't think there's a limit for upload.  I usually upload average of 50-200 AI images at a time per day when I upload.  I don't upload everyday.  Overall AI image approval rate for this year probably is 70% or so.  I only use photo editing software for AI images if I need to remove brand logo.  So, 99% of the time, I just upscale, convert to jpeg and upload.

in fact there is no limit,and this unfortunately slows down the review process a lot,as far as I know,it's not possible for reviewers to know who sent what,so it's not possible to quantify how much you're sending for reviewers.

so only upscale then convert to jpeg index and send?and don't you think that the content you send will be easily surpassed over time by content on which someone has spent more time?

in any case this is also a strategy,you go more on quantity for AI content,ok,I believe that it is not the best strategy over time,I believe that 100 contents in which you have lost at least a week are better than 1000 contents in a week.

if you want advice from someone who certainly knows less than you,because I'm sure you have more experience than me,I would advise you at this point to slow down,and focus more on quality,because you already have thousands of contents for sale,if you continue in the same way you just continue to do what you have already done! :)

In general, I don't edit stock materials much.  If exposure and color is good, just submit.  We are providing base materials for users to edit on their own.  So, for AI photos, mostly exposure and color is perfect already.  I just check for extra/missing fingers, brand logos and submit.  Reason for rejection probably are due to too many similar photo Adobe has already.  So, I'd rather quickly increase my portfolio than slow down.  My photo revenue is up 60-70% now compared to 6 months ago after adding 60-70% more photos mostly AI generated.  So, my strategy is working.  I pay $120/month for Midjourney.  So, I better generate images fast and upload en masse while I pay that much to Midjourney.

Btw, how many images do you have in your portfolio?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: wds on March 17, 2024, 09:18
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.

yes of course,that's why I asked! :D

Do you have an approval rate on reviewed content?mine is about 85%,of content accepted out of the total reviewed,but I dedicate time to every single piece of AI content.

ok when I have time I will try to read everything... I never have time for anything,I'm always making content,my girlfriend is pissed off like a beast! :D

I don't think there's a limit for upload.  I usually upload average of 50-200 AI images at a time per day when I upload.  I don't upload everyday.  Overall AI image approval rate for this year probably is 70% or so.  I only use photo editing software for AI images if I need to remove brand logo.  So, 99% of the time, I just upscale, convert to jpeg and upload.

in fact there is no limit,and this unfortunately slows down the review process a lot,as far as I know,it's not possible for reviewers to know who sent what,so it's not possible to quantify how much you're sending for reviewers.

so only upscale then convert to jpeg index and send?and don't you think that the content you send will be easily surpassed over time by content on which someone has spent more time?

in any case this is also a strategy,you go more on quantity for AI content,ok,I believe that it is not the best strategy over time,I believe that 100 contents in which you have lost at least a week are better than 1000 contents in a week.

if you want advice from someone who certainly knows less than you,because I'm sure you have more experience than me,I would advise you at this point to slow down,and focus more on quality,because you already have thousands of contents for sale,if you continue in the same way you just continue to do what you have already done! :)

In general, I don't edit stock materials much.  If exposure and color is good, just submit.  We are providing base materials for users to edit on their own.  So, for AI photos, mostly exposure and color is perfect already.  I just check for extra/missing fingers, brand logos and submit.  Reason for rejection probably are due to too many similar photo Adobe has already.  So, I'd rather quickly increase my portfolio than slow down.  My photo revenue is up 60-70% now compared to 6 months ago after adding 60-70% more photos mostly AI generated.  So, my strategy is working.  I pay $120/month for Midjourney.  So, I better generate images fast and upload en masse while I pay that much to Midjourney.

Btw, how many images do you have in your portfolio?

Actually, what's interesting about your stats is that you increased your port by X% and your revenue went up roughly an equivalent X%. It seems that you weren't particularly impacted in a negative way by all the AI competition. This is more or less consistent with what I have seen. I have added very little AI content so far, but haven't seen much of a negative impact revenue-wise by the onslaught of all the AI submissions. Maybe the answer is that the percentage of AI content in Adobe is still a small number.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 17, 2024, 09:48
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.  Don't listen to those who never post their ranking here but keep talking crap here.  They may be doing only 1/10 as good as you are.  There's no point in taking any advice from them.

Wow very impressed. How many files you have?

About 2 million photos.
I produce about 1,000 AI photos everyday.
I automate the production with prompt producing AI.  So, I just upload and tag.  I sleep like 2hrs/day.

How many AI images can you send to Adobe per day for review?And what is your acceptance rate?

You know I was just kidding with those numbers, right?  I've already gave my port size number a few times on previous posts.

yes of course,that's why I asked! :D

Do you have an approval rate on reviewed content?mine is about 85%,of content accepted out of the total reviewed,but I dedicate time to every single piece of AI content.

ok when I have time I will try to read everything... I never have time for anything,I'm always making content,my girlfriend is pissed off like a beast! :D

I don't think there's a limit for upload.  I usually upload average of 50-200 AI images at a time per day when I upload.  I don't upload everyday.  Overall AI image approval rate for this year probably is 70% or so.  I only use photo editing software for AI images if I need to remove brand logo.  So, 99% of the time, I just upscale, convert to jpeg and upload.

in fact there is no limit,and this unfortunately slows down the review process a lot,as far as I know,it's not possible for reviewers to know who sent what,so it's not possible to quantify how much you're sending for reviewers.

so only upscale then convert to jpeg index and send?and don't you think that the content you send will be easily surpassed over time by content on which someone has spent more time?

in any case this is also a strategy,you go more on quantity for AI content,ok,I believe that it is not the best strategy over time,I believe that 100 contents in which you have lost at least a week are better than 1000 contents in a week.

if you want advice from someone who certainly knows less than you,because I'm sure you have more experience than me,I would advise you at this point to slow down,and focus more on quality,because you already have thousands of contents for sale,if you continue in the same way you just continue to do what you have already done! :)

In general, I don't edit stock materials much.  If exposure and color is good, just submit.  We are providing base materials for users to edit on their own.  So, for AI photos, mostly exposure and color is perfect already.  I just check for extra/missing fingers, brand logos and submit.  Reason for rejection probably are due to too many similar photo Adobe has already.  So, I'd rather quickly increase my portfolio than slow down.  My photo revenue is up 60-70% now compared to 6 months ago after adding 60-70% more photos mostly AI generated.  So, my strategy is working.  I pay $120/month for Midjourney.  So, I better generate images fast and upload en masse while I pay that much to Midjourney.

Btw, how many images do you have in your portfolio?

Actually, what's interesting about your stats is that you increased your port by X% and your revenue went up roughly an equivalent X%. It seems that you weren't particularly impacted in a negative way by all the AI competition. This is more or less consistent with what I have seen. I have added very little AI content so far, but haven't seen much of a negative impact revenue-wise by the onslaught of all the AI submissions. Maybe the answer is that the percentage of AI content in Adobe is still a small number.

Good point.  Possibly the reason may be buyers abandoned Shutterstock subscription and bought Adobe Stock subscription.  Shutterstock's subscription has been going down according to their financial report.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 17, 2024, 11:51
@blvdone

I prefer not to say the precise number but more than 7000

I'm sure your strategy pays off in the short term,we need to see if it pays off in the long term.

for the moment we are still at the beginning,then we will have to see when the competition increases.

However,you may be right,maybe I waste too much time,but I like to put content on sale that I would buy myself.

I also tried a month as a pro plan with Midjourney,because given the speed with which many of you upload,I thought that the outputs of Midjourney were more correct but this is not the case,90% of the contents have generative errors,until now all AI image generators have errors,and many things to improve.



Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 17, 2024, 12:39
@blvdone

I prefer not to say the precise number but more than 7000

I'm sure your strategy pays off in the short term,we need to see if it pays off in the long term.

for the moment we are still at the beginning,then we will have to see when the competition increases.

However,you may be right,maybe I waste too much time,but I like to put content on sale that I would buy myself.

I also tried a month as a pro plan with Midjourney,because given the speed with which many of you upload,I thought that the outputs of Midjourney were more correct but this is not the case,90% of the contents have generative errors,until now all AI image generators have errors,and many things to improve.

Honestly, there isn't much more to edit AI generated photos other than erasing brand logos in very rare occasions.  I don't waste time tweaking extra/missing fingers or disfigured faces.  I just don't submit those bad ones and generate till I get good ones.  Time is money.  I just try to maximize my output per hour/day.  And based on the number you gave me, my portfolio is making 2x more $$ per photo.  So, no offense, but I know what I'm doing and it's working.  If your photo isn't selling short term, why can you expect them to do well in long term?  It just doesn't make sense unless you are producing seasonal materials way in advance.

And you're right about generating AI images on Midjourney.  Many of the generated images aren't usable.  It takes time to generate images that you want.  You need to work on the prompts and hope AI will give you usable images without extra/missing fingers and limbs.  That's where my time is spent regarding AI image creation. 
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 17, 2024, 18:43
@blvdone

I prefer not to say the precise number but more than 7000

I'm sure your strategy pays off in the short term,we need to see if it pays off in the long term.

for the moment we are still at the beginning,then we will have to see when the competition increases.

However,you may be right,maybe I waste too much time,but I like to put content on sale that I would buy myself.

I also tried a month as a pro plan with Midjourney,because given the speed with which many of you upload,I thought that the outputs of Midjourney were more correct but this is not the case,90% of the contents have generative errors,until now all AI image generators have errors,and many things to improve.

Honestly, there isn't much more to edit AI generated photos other than erasing brand logos in very rare occasions.  I don't waste time tweaking extra/missing fingers or disfigured faces.  Time is money.  I just try to maximize my output per hour/day.  And based on the number you gave me, my portfolio is making 2x more $$ per photo.  So, no offense, but I know what I'm doing and it's working.  If your photo isn't selling short term, why can you expect them to do well in long term?  It just doesn't make sense unless you are producing seasonal materials way in advance.

And you're right about generating AI images on Midjourney.  Many of the generated images aren't usable.  It takes time to generate images that you want.  You need to work on the prompts and hope AI will give you usable images without extra/missing fingers and limbs.  That's where my time is spent regarding AI image creation. 

Since you once wrote that your real photos sell better, how high is approx. the share of your weekly sold AI images?
>30%?

I currently enhance my port, it's really pain in the ass, even if one have already generated images. Hope it pays off, even if I don't believe it.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 17, 2024, 20:16
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.
Well, that actually bothers me and that’s the reason why I don’t want to be featured again on a bestseller list. First time was ok, but after second,  third time, I got 50+ ports copying my images!!! It really sucks, since coming up with original ideas is not that simple and then hundreds of similar images with exactly same description etc… now my profitable niche that I found is over saturated with copycats. I understand ports from 3rd world countries copying, they are desperate and don’t give a flying #$& about copyrights , but in well educated countries you do know about copyrights and yet still openly advertise to copy bestsellers? Why???
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 17, 2024, 20:24
@blvdone

I prefer not to say the precise number but more than 7000

I'm sure your strategy pays off in the short term,we need to see if it pays off in the long term.

for the moment we are still at the beginning,then we will have to see when the competition increases.

However,you may be right,maybe I waste too much time,but I like to put content on sale that I would buy myself.

I also tried a month as a pro plan with Midjourney,because given the speed with which many of you upload,I thought that the outputs of Midjourney were more correct but this is not the case,90% of the contents have generative errors,until now all AI image generators have errors,and many things to improve.

Honestly, there isn't much more to edit AI generated photos other than erasing brand logos in very rare occasions.  I don't waste time tweaking extra/missing fingers or disfigured faces.  Time is money.  I just try to maximize my output per hour/day.  And based on the number you gave me, my portfolio is making 2x more $$ per photo.  So, no offense, but I know what I'm doing and it's working.  If your photo isn't selling short term, why can you expect them to do well in long term?  It just doesn't make sense unless you are producing seasonal materials way in advance.

And you're right about generating AI images on Midjourney.  Many of the generated images aren't usable.  It takes time to generate images that you want.  You need to work on the prompts and hope AI will give you usable images without extra/missing fingers and limbs.  That's where my time is spent regarding AI image creation. 

Since you once wrote that your real photos sell better, how high is approx. the share of your weekly sold AI images?
>30%?

I currently enhance my port, it's really pain in the ass, even if one have already generated images. Hope it pays off, even if I don't believe it.

I don't know.  Probably 30-35%.  40% of my port is AI.  So, less than the percentage of portfolio.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 17, 2024, 20:28
1 good day and 4 slow days somehow kept me at good ranking this week.

My advice to newbies is to listen to people who are doing well and at least much better than you. 
Also look at contributors on Top Seller list and figure out why they are doing well.
https://contributor.stock.adobe.com/en/insights/best/contributors

Just copying their bestsellers may not bring you $$ because everybody may be doing the same and the market is saturated with similar images already.  It can be hit or miss and big disappointment in my own experience.  So, find your niche also and come up with your original idea.

Well, that actually bothers me and that’s the reason why I don’t want to be featured again on a bestseller list. First time was ok, but after second,  third time, I got 50+ ports copying my images!!! It really sucks, since coming up with original ideas is not that simple and then hundreds of similar images with exactly same description etc… now my profitable niche that I found is over saturated with copycats. I understand ports from 3rd world countries copying, they are desperate and don’t give a flying #$& about copyrights , but in well educated countries you do know about copyrights and yet still openly advertise to copy bestsellers? Why???

It's just a common sense to try to create what's selling.  But I was trying to explain a pitfall of creating very similar images.  You got to differentiate from what's already out there in the same concept/genre.  That's my approach.  There's no copyright in concept for photo/video/images.  So, you can't own that.  Nobody owns "business theme", "Christmas theme" etc.

Also, many images on my portfolio top page are images with only 1 recent sale.  And if these don't get additional sales, they'll get pushed back to further down pages.  So, it's not that simple to guess what's really selling on somebody's portfolio.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 17, 2024, 22:10
Adobe is really protecting our bestsellers by mostly showing either new content or stuff with its first sale on the first page.

Very helpful.

Many of my well selling files are very mundane and unassuming. And now adding a lot of illustrations and soon video again, the mix will make it harder to copy specific files.

And for seasonal content I am anyway competing with millions of files using similar decoration objects, so can‘t do much about that.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 18, 2024, 06:59
@blvdone

I prefer not to say the precise number but more than 7000

I'm sure your strategy pays off in the short term,we need to see if it pays off in the long term.

for the moment we are still at the beginning,then we will have to see when the competition increases.

However,you may be right,maybe I waste too much time,but I like to put content on sale that I would buy myself.

I also tried a month as a pro plan with Midjourney,because given the speed with which many of you upload,I thought that the outputs of Midjourney were more correct but this is not the case,90% of the contents have generative errors,until now all AI image generators have errors,and many things to improve.

Honestly, there isn't much more to edit AI generated photos other than erasing brand logos in very rare occasions.  I don't waste time tweaking extra/missing fingers or disfigured faces.  Time is money.  I just try to maximize my output per hour/day.  And based on the number you gave me, my portfolio is making 2x more $$ per photo.  So, no offense, but I know what I'm doing and it's working.  If your photo isn't selling short term, why can you expect them to do well in long term?  It just doesn't make sense unless you are producing seasonal materials way in advance.

And you're right about generating AI images on Midjourney.  Many of the generated images aren't usable.  It takes time to generate images that you want.  You need to work on the prompts and hope AI will give you usable images without extra/missing fingers and limbs.  That's where my time is spent regarding AI image creation.

but absolutely,like I said maybe you're right and I'm wrong! :)

but you see,the point is that AI content that is not unique is easy to copy with a prompt,anyone can do it,but if instead you waste time and try to create something unique,adding or removing elements and improving the content,a that point is not easy to replicate,and takes time.

but maybe my approach is wrong and in the end you are right,for the moment you are certainly earning more than me so you are better off doing as you do.

I can't do it,I can't put content on sale with all these errors,yesterday for example I was working on an AI content and I said to myself,ok I can do this quickly,then instead 2 hours later I was still there working on the content,then when in the end I saw the result I was satisfied,and I'm sure if someone wants to try to copy it with just a prompt it's impossible.

but as I said,perhaps all this is of no use and perhaps you are right to do as you do,we'll see with time,in the meantime I will continue to work on AI content as I always do,I will try to speed up a bit if I can. :)

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Jo Ann Snover on March 18, 2024, 07:18
...  So, it's not that simple to guess what's really selling on somebody's portfolio.

You can filter portfolios if you know the way to edit the URL - in other words Adobe doesn't provide the UI but the features are there. So your portfolio in download order:

https://stock.adobe.com/contributor/203855208/blvdone?&order=nb_downloads

The genAI images in your portfolio in download order:

https://stock.adobe.com/contributor/203855208/blvdone?&order=nb_downloads&filters%5Bgentech%5D=only
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 18, 2024, 08:09
...  So, it's not that simple to guess what's really selling on somebody's portfolio.

You can filter portfolios if you know the way to edit the URL - in other words Adobe doesn't provide the UI but the features are there. So your portfolio in download order:

https://stock.adobe.com/contributor/203855208/blvdone?&order=nb_downloads

The genAI images in your portfolio in download order:

https://stock.adobe.com/contributor/203855208/blvdone?&order=nb_downloads&filters%5Bgentech%5D=only

Oh nice.  Thank you!!

I checked out your portfolio too!
https://stock.adobe.com/contributor/4221/jo-ann-snover?&order=nb_downloads
https://stock.adobe.com/contributor/4221/jo-ann-snover?&order=nb_downloads&filters%5Bgentech%5D=only

You don't do AI yet?  I'm surprised.
My approach is to create AI versions of my own bestsellers first.

I think I'll start shooting/generating house renovation images too.  That's where the money is!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 18, 2024, 08:17
OK start this week.  March has been consistent.  But I like the progress I've made so far by adding AI generated images.
When I release my "How to get rich quick by selling AI images on Adobe Stock" tutorial video for $100, all newbies out there should buy.   :D :D  It took 10 years to get to the level I was at with regular photos.  It took only 6 months to nearly double that level by adding AI generated images.  I thought AI images would destroy us, but so far not a bad deal.  I started way too late in AI images, but somehow made it work.  It must have been a bonanza for those who started at the beginning of last year.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: wds on March 18, 2024, 08:35
It seems that AI sales haven't overly hurt sales of non-AI images which is a nice thing!
That also implies a big win for Adobestock in additional revenue. I also wonder how
contributors (especially exclusive) at other agencies that don't allow AI uploads feel about it?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 18, 2024, 08:38
It seems that AI sales haven't overly hurt sales of non-AI images which is a nice thing!

Yes, that hasn't happened yet so far.  Good!!
I think I'm getting more non-AI photo sales because I get more traffic to my portfolio from AI photos.  So, adding more materials to your portfolio is good in general.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 18, 2024, 09:18
OK start this week.  March has been consistent.  But I like the progress I've made so far by adding AI generated images.
When I release my "How to get rich quick by selling AI images on Adobe Stock" tutorial video for $100, all newbies out there should buy.   :D :D  It took 10 years to get to the level I was at with regular photos.  It took only 6 months to nearly double that level by adding AI generated images.  I thought AI images would destroy us, but so far not a bad deal.  I started way too late in AI images, but somehow made it work.  It must have been a bonanza for those who started at the beginning of last year.

exactly it took you 10 years to get to level 1,on Adobe from what I've seen time from how much you are a contributor is a key point for how much you sell,as it should be,I think it is right that contributors who start earlier earn more I have been a contributor on Adobe for only 6 years,and I currently have less than 1000 AI contents for sale.

in my opinion you sell more AI content because in general you sell more of everything because you have been a contributor for longer,my 6 years are still few.

congratulations,and i hope one day i can arrive where you are now! :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 18, 2024, 09:23
OK start this week.  March has been consistent.  But I like the progress I've made so far by adding AI generated images.
When I release my "How to get rich quick by selling AI images on Adobe Stock" tutorial video for $100, all newbies out there should buy.   :D :D  It took 10 years to get to the level I was at with regular photos.  It took only 6 months to nearly double that level by adding AI generated images.  I thought AI images would destroy us, but so far not a bad deal.  I started way too late in AI images, but somehow made it work.  It must have been a bonanza for those who started at the beginning of last year.

exactly it took you 10 years to get to level 1,on Adobe from what I've seen time from how much you are a contributor is a key point for how much you sell,as it should be,I think it is right that contributors who start earlier earn more I have been a contributor on Adobe for only 6 years,and I currently have less than 1000 AI contents for sale.

in my opinion you sell more AI content because in general you sell more of everything because you have been a contributor for longer,my 6 years are still few.

congratulations,and i hope one day i can arrive where you are now! :)

Thank you!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 18, 2024, 09:27
It seems that AI sales haven't overly hurt sales of non-AI images which is a nice thing!
That also implies a big win for Adobestock in additional revenue. I also wonder how
contributors (especially exclusive) at other agencies that don't allow AI uploads feel about it?

I have always thought that AI content cannot reduce the sales of real content,AI content is a separate thing that goes on its own,however,I remain convinced that it needs to be regulated in a better way.


I hope that SS also decides to accept AI content,but I doubt it,perhaps there could also be a reason related to how their sales system works,or they are simply no longer interested in continuing this business with contributors.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: wds on March 18, 2024, 09:44
I think if an agency that is selling AI images is seeing a sales boom, then agencies that are not selling AI content soon will be selling AI content.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 18, 2024, 11:27
Down to pos 3210, Adobe me and easter don‘t get along :(

need to add more variety and non seasonal content
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 18, 2024, 12:40
Down to pos 3210, Adobe me and easter don‘t get along :(

need to add more variety and non seasonal content

 :D my Easter isn't going great either!

3210 is exactly my best position ever,welcome back to my area! :D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 18, 2024, 12:42
I think if an agency that is selling AI images is seeing a sales boom, then agencies that are not selling AI content soon will be selling AI content.

and I can't help but hope you're right! :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 18, 2024, 14:13
I think if an agency that is selling AI images is seeing a sales boom, then agencies that are not selling AI content soon will be selling AI content.

I don't think it's that easy.  For example, Shutterstock isn't taking AI works for 2 reasons I think.  1 is they want their own AI generator to generate AI images so that they'll keep 100% of revenue.  2 is the potential legal issue in future.  You never know if there may be massive lawsuit against AI generated images.  They don't want to risk that.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 19, 2024, 02:30
@blvdone

I prefer not to say the precise number but more than 7000

I'm sure your strategy pays off in the short term,we need to see if it pays off in the long term.

for the moment we are still at the beginning,then we will have to see when the competition increases.

However,you may be right,maybe I waste too much time,but I like to put content on sale that I would buy myself.

I also tried a month as a pro plan with Midjourney,because given the speed with which many of you upload,I thought that the outputs of Midjourney were more correct but this is not the case,90% of the contents have generative errors,until now all AI image generators have errors,and many things to improve.

Honestly, there isn't much more to edit AI generated photos other than erasing brand logos in very rare occasions.  I don't waste time tweaking extra/missing fingers or disfigured faces.  I just don't submit those bad ones and generate till I get good ones.  Time is money.  I just try to maximize my output per hour/day.  And based on the number you gave me, my portfolio is making 2x more $$ per photo.  So, no offense, but I know what I'm doing and it's working.  If your photo isn't selling short term, why can you expect them to do well in long term?  It just doesn't make sense unless you are producing seasonal materials way in advance.

And you're right about generating AI images on Midjourney.  Many of the generated images aren't usable.  It takes time to generate images that you want.  You need to work on the prompts and hope AI will give you usable images without extra/missing fingers and limbs.  That's where my time is spent regarding AI image creation.

Yeah, same here. In the beginning I was fixing quite long generative errors until I realized I loose to much time by doing this.
So instead I now first try to formulate a better prompt or search for a better Stable Diffusion model, which generates less errors.
I currently spend max. 2 minutes for retouche after upscaling.

With AI upscaler I even can automatically retouche minor errors or I'm fixing them very rough and quickly and the AI makes the rest.

So it's as you said time is money and you have to maximize it.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 19, 2024, 08:14
@blvdone

I prefer not to say the precise number but more than 7000

I'm sure your strategy pays off in the short term,we need to see if it pays off in the long term.

for the moment we are still at the beginning,then we will have to see when the competition increases.

However,you may be right,maybe I waste too much time,but I like to put content on sale that I would buy myself.

I also tried a month as a pro plan with Midjourney,because given the speed with which many of you upload,I thought that the outputs of Midjourney were more correct but this is not the case,90% of the contents have generative errors,until now all AI image generators have errors,and many things to improve.

Honestly, there isn't much more to edit AI generated photos other than erasing brand logos in very rare occasions.  I don't waste time tweaking extra/missing fingers or disfigured faces.  I just don't submit those bad ones and generate till I get good ones.  Time is money.  I just try to maximize my output per hour/day.  And based on the number you gave me, my portfolio is making 2x more $$ per photo.  So, no offense, but I know what I'm doing and it's working.  If your photo isn't selling short term, why can you expect them to do well in long term?  It just doesn't make sense unless you are producing seasonal materials way in advance.

And you're right about generating AI images on Midjourney.  Many of the generated images aren't usable.  It takes time to generate images that you want.  You need to work on the prompts and hope AI will give you usable images without extra/missing fingers and limbs.  That's where my time is spent regarding AI image creation.

Yeah, same here. In the beginning I was fixing quite long generative errors until I realized I loose to much time by doing this.
So instead I now first try to formulate a better prompt or search for a better Stable Diffusion model, which generates less errors.
I currently spend max. 2 minutes for retouche after upscaling.

With AI upscaler I even can automatically retouche minor errors or I'm fixing them very rough and quickly and the AI makes the rest.

So it's as you said time is money and you have to maximize it.

yes that's probably the case,I spend more time in post-production and less time on prompts,also because until I see the images in detail in Photoshop or Lightroom I can't be sure of anything.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 19, 2024, 08:18
I think if an agency that is selling AI images is seeing a sales boom, then agencies that are not selling AI content soon will be selling AI content.

I don't think it's that easy.  For example, Shutterstock isn't taking AI works for 2 reasons I think.  1 is they want their own AI generator to generate AI images so that they'll keep 100% of revenue.  2 is the potential legal issue in future.  You never know if there may be massive lawsuit against AI generated images.  They don't want to risk that.

I see 1 as much more likely,I don't think SS is concerned about legal issues.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 19, 2024, 21:28
BTW, I love generating AI images.  It's so much fun!!!  Especially when I try my own concept.  I do keyword search to see if anybody already uploaded similar theme/concept.  When I find not many are out there yet, I feel really motivated. 
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 20, 2024, 11:45
BTW, I love generating AI images.  It's so much fun!!!  Especially when I try my own concept.  I do keyword search to see if anybody already uploaded similar theme/concept.  When I find not many are out there yet, I feel really motivated.

yes AI are addictive! :D

I agree,doing a search for missing content is always a good idea.

I still have to evaluate how this AI content goes if it can really make a difference,I still have too little to be able to make a judgement,in a couple of months,I will be able to understand much more about it,for the moment I am selling more real content,more vector lately.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on March 20, 2024, 18:29
It's just a common sense to try to create what's selling.  But I was trying to explain a pitfall of creating very similar images.  You got to differentiate from what's already out there in the same concept/genre.  That's my approach.  There's no copyright in concept for photo/video/images.  So, you can't own that.  Nobody owns "business theme", "Christmas theme" etc.

Also, many images on my portfolio top page are images with only 1 recent sale.  And if these don't get additional sales, they'll get pushed back to further down pages.  So, it's not that simple to guess what's really selling on somebody's portfolio.

A lot of people copy images almost one to one along with titles, etc. that’s what is bothering me. Not a just a knowledge that concept of technology or Christmas theme is selling well, so they should do technology and Christmas images. (Yes, those themes sell the best, but there are millions of images of tech and Xmas that don’t sell at all)
I do own a copyright to my hand drawn illustrations and I don’t want them to be copied. It takes a lot of time to report it.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 20, 2024, 21:32
It's just a common sense to try to create what's selling.  But I was trying to explain a pitfall of creating very similar images.  You got to differentiate from what's already out there in the same concept/genre.  That's my approach.  There's no copyright in concept for photo/video/images.  So, you can't own that.  Nobody owns "business theme", "Christmas theme" etc.

Also, many images on my portfolio top page are images with only 1 recent sale.  And if these don't get additional sales, they'll get pushed back to further down pages.  So, it's not that simple to guess what's really selling on somebody's portfolio.

A lot of people copy images almost one to one along with titles, etc. that’s what is bothering me. Not a just a knowledge that concept of technology or Christmas theme is selling well, so they should do technology and Christmas images. (Yes, those themes sell the best, but there are millions of images of tech and Xmas that don’t sell at all)
I do own a copyright to my hand drawn illustrations and I don’t want them to be copied. It takes a lot of time to report it.

Yeah, I hear you.  But it has nothing to do with me.  So, good luck.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 21, 2024, 08:07
This week, numbers are good near BWE, but ranking is just usual.  Everybody else must be doing well this week.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 21, 2024, 10:18
I dropped in rank, but my sales volume is going up.

So sales are probably increasing, spring break is over.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 21, 2024, 16:18
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 21, 2024, 17:44
Nice jump in earnings and downloads.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 21, 2024, 17:45
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on March 21, 2024, 18:00
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

Page 1, first post - you can read it there.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 21, 2024, 18:22
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 21, 2024, 18:23
Nice jump in earnings and downloads.

Thanks!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 22, 2024, 01:02
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 22, 2024, 05:58
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

If you only have 1 sale per week for 2,600 images, you aren't producing the right kind of images.  Beautiful image that nobody need won't sell.  You got to focus on market research.  Otherwise you'll be wasting time and will be massively disappointed and exhausted.

These videos may help you get a better idea.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM)

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 22, 2024, 06:29
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

Not gonna lie, that's pretty bad. I have currently a port of approx 700 AI images and weekly up to 10 sales, which is also pretty bad.
I have added in the beginning much crappy stuff, which I now sort out and upload new better content.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 22, 2024, 06:33
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

If you only have 1 sale per week for 2,600 images, you aren't producing the right kind of images.  Beautiful image that nobody need won't sell.  You got to focus on market research.  Otherwise you'll be wasting time and will be massively disappointed and exhausted.

These videos may help you get a better idea.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM)

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs)

Thanks for the links. I usually produce landscapes or aerial photos and videos.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 22, 2024, 06:38
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

If you only have 1 sale per week for 2,600 images, you aren't producing the right kind of images.  Beautiful image that nobody need won't sell.  You got to focus on market research.  Otherwise you'll be wasting time and will be massively disappointed and exhausted.

These videos may help you get a better idea.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM)

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs)

Thanks for the links. I usually produce landscapes or aerial photos and videos.

Landscapes can be very saturated already especially famous places.  I haven't had good results either.  Those can be the beautiful images that don't sell because of supply/demand balance.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 22, 2024, 06:39
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

Not gonna lie, that's pretty bad. I have currently a port of approx 700 AI images and weekly up to 10 sales, which is also pretty bad.
I have added in the beginning much crappy stuff, which I now sort out and upload new better content.

I was thinking, that's because maybe I have started last year, and don't have enough views. Or something like this.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 22, 2024, 06:44
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

Not gonna lie, that's pretty bad. I have currently a port of approx 700 AI images and weekly up to 10 sales, which is also pretty bad.
I have added in the beginning much crappy stuff, which I now sort out and upload new better content.

I was thinking, that's because maybe I have started last year, and don't have enough views. Or something like this.

What I would do is to keyword search for similar images you have uploaded and sort by "Download" to see what's the difference between your image and the ones selling the most.  I don't think it has anything to do with you started last year.  That's too optimistic.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 22, 2024, 06:53
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

If you only have 1 sale per week for 2,600 images, you aren't producing the right kind of images.  Beautiful image that nobody need won't sell.  You got to focus on market research.  Otherwise you'll be wasting time and will be massively disappointed and exhausted.

These videos may help you get a better idea.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM)

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs)

Thanks for the links. I usually produce landscapes or aerial photos and videos.

Landscapes can be very saturated already especially famous places.  I haven't had good results either.  Those can be the beautiful images that don't sell because of supply/demand balance.

Some drone landscape images do sell good. Sold some couple of times. Everything with the camera, is not really good with sales for some reason.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 22, 2024, 06:58
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

Not gonna lie, that's pretty bad. I have currently a port of approx 700 AI images and weekly up to 10 sales, which is also pretty bad.
I have added in the beginning much crappy stuff, which I now sort out and upload new better content.

I was thinking, that's because maybe I have started last year, and don't have enough views. Or something like this.

What I would do is to keyword search for similar images you have uploaded and sort by "Download" to see what's the difference between your image and the ones selling the most.  I don't think it has anything to do with you started last year.  That's too optimistic.

So you saying that's because of my keywords might be wrong or not enough?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 22, 2024, 07:19
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

If you only have 1 sale per week for 2,600 images, you aren't producing the right kind of images.  Beautiful image that nobody need won't sell.  You got to focus on market research.  Otherwise you'll be wasting time and will be massively disappointed and exhausted.

These videos may help you get a better idea.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM)

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs)

Thanks for the links. I usually produce landscapes or aerial photos and videos.

Landscapes can be very saturated already especially famous places.  I haven't had good results either.  Those can be the beautiful images that don't sell because of supply/demand balance.

Some drone landscape images do sell good. Sold some couple of times. Everything with the camera, is not really good with sales for some reason.

Drone videos sell well too.  If I'm allowed to fly drones anywhere, I'll be focusing on that too.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on March 22, 2024, 07:33
Just had a huge day today.  On it's way to BWE for photos on Adobe Stock.  Thank you for your support!!

Was wondering how many photos you have on your port. For me if I sell a file a week, I'm lucky.

I have about 10,400 photos right now.  About 4,200 are AI generated.  How many do you have?  Less than 10?

No man, around 2600 images and 500 videos. Probably because I have started recently.

If you only have 1 sale per week for 2,600 images, you aren't producing the right kind of images.  Beautiful image that nobody need won't sell.  You got to focus on market research.  Otherwise you'll be wasting time and will be massively disappointed and exhausted.

These videos may help you get a better idea.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=I14GQG6frrU)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FHefBPjE8yE)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hpsGOGyGzNM)

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=h-RwKAa1XIs)

Thanks for the links. I usually produce landscapes or aerial photos and videos.

Landscapes can be very saturated already especially famous places.  I haven't had good results either.  Those can be the beautiful images that don't sell because of supply/demand balance.

Some drone landscape images do sell good. Sold some couple of times. Everything with the camera, is not really good with sales for some reason.

Drone videos sell well too.  If I'm allowed to fly drones anywhere, I'll be focusing on that too.

To honest o have sold only 1 video with my gopro and 1 with the drone. Not many have sold. Most of my videos are taken with my drones.

Own 3 of them so I can fly them everywhere.

I'm doing some Ai images, not sure how these will sell.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 22, 2024, 09:41
Finally I cracked above 1,000th because of yesterday's hot sales.  Also it's already the BWE for photo downloads this week.  Nice!!

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 22, 2024, 16:56
Finally I cracked above 1,000th because of yesterday's hot sales.  Also it's already the BWE for photo downloads this week.  Nice!!

Good job! How many times has your best AI photo sold? And are you seeing the majority of new sales from AI, or your previous/real life photography photos?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 22, 2024, 17:29
Finally I cracked above 1,000th because of yesterday's hot sales.  Also it's already the BWE for photo downloads this week.  Nice!!

Good job! How many times has your best AI photo sold? And are you seeing the majority of new sales from AI, or your previous/real life photography photos?

Thanks!!  I think my conventional photos still sell more than AI photos per photos, but it took 10 years to get 6,000 photos in my port and took 6 months to get 4,000 AI photos in my port.  So, AI photos are way more efficient as business.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on March 22, 2024, 19:20
Finally I cracked above 1,000th because of yesterday's hot sales.  Also it's already the BWE for photo downloads this week.  Nice!!

Very good! Congrats!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 22, 2024, 19:33
Finally I cracked above 1,000th because of yesterday's hot sales.  Also it's already the BWE for photo downloads this week.  Nice!!

Very good! Congrats!

Thanks!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 23, 2024, 06:44
pos 2940

probably not bad for a 4200 file port, but I was hoping for much better spring sales.

need many more files. now upped my midjourney contract to 60 dollars to enable stealth mode. and hopefully that will push me to do more with midjourney to get better at using it. i still don't feel really comfortable but it does make much better people than stable.

also trying to do more with firefly.

now have prompting costs around 100 dollars a month. but longterm it should be worth it.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 23, 2024, 07:29
pos 2940

probably not bad for a 4200 file port, but I was hoping for much better spring sales.

need many more files. now upped my midjourney contract to 60 dollars to enable stealth mode. and hopefully that will push me to do more with midjourney to get better at using it. i still don't feel really comfortable but it does make much better people than stable.

also trying to do more with firefly.

now have prompting costs around 100 dollars a month. but longterm it should be worth it.

Just triple your content and you'll get near 1,000th.  Not bad for 4,000 images.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 23, 2024, 08:05
I am trying!! But I rarely upload more than 20 files a day. Maybe it will get better with midjourney, we will see.

Also started again with regular photos/videos.

I must diversify and also send content to other agencies. You never know what happens, perhaps ai will die next year if so many people are pushing content in.

Especially editorial should keep its value or might even go up in value.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 23, 2024, 08:16
pos 2940

probably not bad for a 4200 file port, but I was hoping for much better spring sales.

need many more files. now upped my midjourney contract to 60 dollars to enable stealth mode. and hopefully that will push me to do more with midjourney to get better at using it. i still don't feel really comfortable but it does make much better people than stable.

also trying to do more with firefly.

now have prompting costs around 100 dollars a month. but longterm it should be worth it.

Just triple your content and you'll get near 1,000th.  Not bad for 4,000 images.

Not really. Tripled/quadrupled/etc content does not necessarily correlate with increased sales. I.e., if you had 5,000 pictures of bananas, and went to 15,000 pictures of bananas, you probably wouldn't see an increase in sales, of course, unless, people went bananas for bananas...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 23, 2024, 08:45
Finally I cracked above 1,000th because of yesterday's hot sales.  Also it's already the BWE for photo downloads this week.  Nice!!

wow fantastic!a well deserved result! :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 23, 2024, 08:49
pos 2940

probably not bad for a 4200 file port, but I was hoping for much better spring sales.

need many more files. now upped my midjourney contract to 60 dollars to enable stealth mode. and hopefully that will push me to do more with midjourney to get better at using it. i still don't feel really comfortable but it does make much better people than stable.

also trying to do more with firefly.

now have prompting costs around 100 dollars a month. but longterm it should be worth it.

Just triple your content and you'll get near 1,000th.  Not bad for 4,000 images.

Not really. Tripled/quadrupled/etc content does not necessarily correlate with increased sales. I.e., if you had 5,000 pictures of bananas, and went to 15,000 pictures of bananas, you probably wouldn't see an increase in sales, of course, unless, people went bananas for bananas...


Don't you ever dare to discuss my bananas! :D

anyway no,it's not like that,it depends on what photos of bananas they are,if they are all similar it's as you say,but if they are different 10,000 more photos of anything,even bananas always make a difference.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 23, 2024, 09:00
I am trying!! But I rarely upload more than 20 files a day. Maybe it will get better with midjourney, we will see.

Also started again with regular photos/videos.

I must diversify and also send content to other agencies. You never know what happens, perhaps ai will die next year if so many people are pushing content in.

Especially editorial should keep its value or might even go up in value.

Firefly is better in my opinion,Midjourney is better for some things,but the way it works with Discord is too annoying,not only do you have to use stealth mode,but then you would have to operate in a private server,with which you only have the Midjourney BOT,and you have to adjust the settings so that no one can access your server,and then all this is not enough,you also have to unpublish the images in the Midjourney feed,not just in Discord.

so while you do all this your images will still be seen by other users in the Midjourney feed not in the Discord feed.

before I started operating in this way,I discovered that someone was copying all my prompts,in Discord there are people who do just this,they follow the feeds and copy and paste the prompts...very annoying!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on March 23, 2024, 09:23
I am trying!! But I rarely upload more than 20 files a day. Maybe it will get better with midjourney, we will see.

Also started again with regular photos/videos.

I must diversify and also send content to other agencies. You never know what happens, perhaps ai will die next year if so many people are pushing content in.

Especially editorial should keep its value or might even go up in value.

Firefly is better in my opinion,Midjourney is better for some things,but the way it works with Discord is too annoying,not only do you have to use stealth mode,but then you would have to operate in a private server,with which you only have the Midjourney BOT,and you have to adjust the settings so that no one can access your server,and then all this is not enough,you also have to unpublish the images in the Midjourney feed,not just in Discord.

so while you do all this your images will still be seen by other users in the Midjourney feed not in the Discord feed.

before I started operating in this way,I discovered that someone was copying all my prompts,in Discord there are people who do just this,they follow the feeds and copy and paste the prompts...very annoying!

Could you please clarify? As far as I know - all images are stealth... what "midjourney" feed are you referring to?

Thanks!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 23, 2024, 09:57
All images you prompt are visible to anyone else, to download, to use the prompt etc....it is one of the reasons why so much midjourney content is near identical. people do a search, find the image presented on adobe with high downloads and just reuse the prompt.

from 60 dollars a month onwards, you can enable a "stealth" mode, then your images and your prompting remains private.

however, it probably means you have to keep paying that forever, because as soon as you downgrade your content is visible again.

so i am not sure this is a good longterm solution.

firefly and stable are private.

 
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 23, 2024, 10:37
pos 2940

probably not bad for a 4200 file port, but I was hoping for much better spring sales.

need many more files. now upped my midjourney contract to 60 dollars to enable stealth mode. and hopefully that will push me to do more with midjourney to get better at using it. i still don't feel really comfortable but it does make much better people than stable.

also trying to do more with firefly.

now have prompting costs around 100 dollars a month. but longterm it should be worth it.

Just triple your content and you'll get near 1,000th.  Not bad for 4,000 images.

Not really. Tripled/quadrupled/etc content does not necessarily correlate with increased sales. I.e., if you had 5,000 pictures of bananas, and went to 15,000 pictures of bananas, you probably wouldn't see an increase in sales, of course, unless, people went bananas for bananas...

How many photos do you have in your portfolio?
I increased my portfolio by 70% in 6 months.  And my downloads/revenue is up exactly by 70% now.  So, if you know what you're doing and don't produce craps that don't sell, it can go up by what you add.  Cobalt is a veteran and knows what she's doing.  So, I expect her to produce contents that are equally productive in the future.  Of course it always doesn't happen, but can happen.  Growth can slow or accelerate as you add more contents in your portfolio.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 23, 2024, 10:38
Finally I cracked above 1,000th because of yesterday's hot sales.  Also it's already the BWE for photo downloads this week.  Nice!!

wow fantastic!a well deserved result! :)

Thank you!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 23, 2024, 10:40
because as soon as you downgrade your content is visible again.

Where did you get that info?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 23, 2024, 10:46
I am trying!! But I rarely upload more than 20 files a day. Maybe it will get better with midjourney, we will see.

Also started again with regular photos/videos.

I must diversify and also send content to other agencies. You never know what happens, perhaps ai will die next year if so many people are pushing content in.

Especially editorial should keep its value or might even go up in value.

Firefly is better in my opinion,Midjourney is better for some things,but the way it works with Discord is too annoying,not only do you have to use stealth mode,but then you would have to operate in a private server,with which you only have the Midjourney BOT,and you have to adjust the settings so that no one can access your server,and then all this is not enough,you also have to unpublish the images in the Midjourney feed,not just in Discord.

so while you do all this your images will still be seen by other users in the Midjourney feed not in the Discord feed.

before I started operating in this way,I discovered that someone was copying all my prompts,in Discord there are people who do just this,they follow the feeds and copy and paste the prompts...very annoying!

Could you please clarify? As far as I know - all images are stealth... what "midjourney" feed are you referring to?

Thanks!

stealth mode is not enough,is enough just for Discord feed,go to the Midjourney site,where you manage your subscription,there you have all your images that you can download in compressed folders,then select all the images and then select "unpublish"
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 23, 2024, 11:06
because as soon as you downgrade your content is visible again.

Where did you get that info?

read it somewhere in one of the ai groups.

if you are unsure, ask them directly.

the stealth option is missing from the cheaper plans. this should mean it all goes public again.

but it would make sense, to keep us in the higher plan.

eta: perhaps we can delete content?

If we really want to downgrade, make sure every file with prompt is secured, then delete it completely??
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 23, 2024, 11:09
I am trying!! But I rarely upload more than 20 files a day. Maybe it will get better with midjourney, we will see.

Also started again with regular photos/videos.

I must diversify and also send content to other agencies. You never know what happens, perhaps ai will die next year if so many people are pushing content in.

Especially editorial should keep its value or might even go up in value.

Firefly is better in my opinion,Midjourney is better for some things,but the way it works with Discord is too annoying,not only do you have to use stealth mode,but then you would have to operate in a private server,with which you only have the Midjourney BOT,and you have to adjust the settings so that no one can access your server,and then all this is not enough,you also have to unpublish the images in the Midjourney feed,not just in Discord.

so while you do all this your images will still be seen by other users in the Midjourney feed not in the Discord feed.

before I started operating in this way,I discovered that someone was copying all my prompts,in Discord there are people who do just this,they follow the feeds and copy and paste the prompts...very annoying!

Could you please clarify? As far as I know - all images are stealth... what "midjourney" feed are you referring to?

Thanks!

stealth mode is not enough,is enough just for Discord feed,go to the Midjourney site,where you manage your subscription,there you have all your images that you can download in compressed folders,then select all the images and then select "unpublish"

thank you, will try to figure it out.

I think I might just totally delete files, once I have them all secured.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 23, 2024, 11:13
because as soon as you downgrade your content is visible again.

Where did you get that info?

From what I read before starting to use Midjourney,the stealth mode and the private server may be enough to hide your actions with Midjourney,but then some online research,I read that you also need to unpublish on the MIdjourney site,and maybe that's another reason too,that when you downgrade your content is visible again.

in any case I unpublish manually on the Midjourney site after each hour-long session.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 23, 2024, 11:26
that is quite sneaky, thank you for pointing this out.

you think you are safe in stealth mode, then you still need to unpublish manually every single file.

I think I might start deleting completely

Can we delete completely??

eta: cannot find a delete button...

next question: do the files stay unpublished if I downgrade?

that would open the option of doing one month hardcore midjourney in stealth mode, next month downgrade to 10 dollars, then again one month in stealth mode etc...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 23, 2024, 12:06
that is quite sneaky, thank you for pointing this out.

you think you are safe in stealth mode, then you still need to unpublish manually every single file.

I think I might start deleting completely

Can we delete completely??

eta: cannot find a delete button...

next question: do the files stay unpublished if I downgrade?

that would open the option of doing one month hardcore midjourney in stealth mode, next month downgrade to 10 dollars, then again one month in stealth mode etc...

as far as I know the only way to delete images from Midjourney is by reacting to the message in Discord with X symbol and images are deleted not even immediately but in 20 min  :-\


Midjourney is designed to be public so I don't like it very much,you still have to bother a little if you want to make sure your content isn't visible somewhere.

yes Cobalt,once manually unpublished they remain so.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 23, 2024, 12:25
because as soon as you downgrade your content is visible again.

Where did you get that info?

From what I read before starting to use Midjourney,the stealth mode and the private server may be enough to hide your actions with Midjourney,but then some online research,I read that you also need to unpublish on the MIdjourney site,and maybe that's another reason too,that when you downgrade your content is visible again.

in any case I unpublish manually on the Midjourney site after each hour-long session.

I found the publish/unpublish on Midjourney.com archive page a few months ago and have been unpublishing everything.  Midjourney.com archive page is much easier to navigate and download photos you generated/upscaled unlike doing that on Discord.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 23, 2024, 12:43
thank you both, really very useful info!!!

will certainly always unpublish and drop my costs by doing a monthly switch in plans.

I am now mostly using the archive page instead of discord.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 23, 2024, 13:39
now with the new Midjourney Alpha interface is possible to easily reuse prompts of other users too,so better unpublish manually everything!

yes the archive page simplifies life.

I think Midjourney is too expensive,I had the pro plan for a while.

in my opinion Firefly is better,for many reasons,more practical,faster,private,and offers you more interesting variations,and it has other advantages too.

Midjourney has more attractive graphics,for some types of content,but it's quite cumbersome and public.

but this just my personal opinion!









Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 23, 2024, 14:08
I agree. I just think for people content midjourney has the best.

But doing it for one month, unpublish everything after prompting, should e enough. then a one or two month break.

will try to get better with firefly. at least then we are supporting our own files.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 26, 2024, 14:41
Currently pos 2780

Thank you for explaining how unpublishing works. Now I do it every day.

Will probably also downgrade midjourney to the 30 dollar plan next month and then toggle between intensive use months and relaxed use months.

I still find it very difficult to get what I want from any of the ais I am using. Which perhaps is a good thing, if I struggle so will many customers.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 26, 2024, 16:22
Currently pos 2780

Thank you for explaining how unpublishing works. Now I do it every day.

Will probably also downgrade midjourney to the 30 dollar plan next month and then toggle between intensive use months and relaxed use months.

I still find it very difficult to get what I want from any of the ais I am using. Which perhaps is a good thing, if I struggle so will many customers.

I see you're having a good week too,if you had continued these years you could have lived on microstocks by now! :)

Today,I reached the second best month in terms of sales numbers,my approval rate for AI content also rises to 90%

look like the average earnings for contributors on Adobe Stock is rising too,given that we continue to slowly earn more but more or less remain in the same positions,it means that the general average is rising.

AI outputs are incomplete images,if you look at them in general they may look ok,but if you look at them in detail they won't.

all AI outputs have chromatic aberrations to begin with,then if you see them up to 100% they may not be noticeable,but they are there,and which are obviously just defects in the rendering.

but then it's not just this,they lack details,and often if we waste a little time we can create better images with more details.

in general I believe that trying to create something which if seen at 100% is appreciable is the general rule,there are very few AI outputs that are fine as they are,abstract ones of course can also be fine as they are.

I try to see the AI ​​outputs as a basis for the final image,a starting point,the combination of Photoshop generative fill and expand,plus photo editing and more can certainly lead to results in which the purchase of the image becomes extremely convenient for the customer who will never be able to generate anything similar just with a prompt.

Firefly is better at interpreting prompts,even with simple prompts you can often create what you want.

yes,maybe I will use Midjourney again in the future,but not for now,I already have thousands of contents to work on in post production,for the moment I think it's enough! :D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 28, 2024, 16:04
my last rise before the steep fall, next week I will be back down to 4200

pos 2340, 4280 files

but I like that the adobe system is so dynamic. if you have what clients want there is no barrier to moving up.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: zeljkok on March 28, 2024, 19:04
My AS port is less than 2000 landscape/travel stills & can't compete with some of people here, but today was a nice surprise.  This is most likely same customer, interesting 2 downloads of same image within few seconds, first normal sub then probably something enhanced.   

Anyone interested, this is quite famous Mt. Robson and Berg Lake, one of most iconic back-country areas in Canadian Rockies
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 28, 2024, 19:31
Those are both lovely images and very good sales. Congratulations!

Not everyone wants to rebuild a full time stock income. In a different life I would probably enjoy the journey a lot more if I was doing stock more as a hobby.

I am sharing my results because I know many people are considering doing stock again more seriously and wondering if it is still possible to rise in ranks with the current flood of incoming content.

So I think it is encouraging that the Adobe system is very dynamic. Frustrating when it all drops back down of course, but once I have a port with 12k files it will be more stable.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 28, 2024, 22:33
Just fell off the cliff.  Fall from grace.  I was at 1,030-1,080th till yesterday, but 50% down in a day.  My haters must be celebrating.  They are definitely entitled to it.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 29, 2024, 01:50
That is just the holiday/spring break

You will move back up when they are back at work, I will fall down because the holiday is over.

But again, it shows how dynamic the system is.

There are people with 60 000 fies who have never seen anything near your current rank. You are doing exceptionally well.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 29, 2024, 07:32
That is just the holiday/spring break

You will move back up when they are back at work, I will fall down because the holiday is over.

But again, it shows how dynamic the system is.

There are people with 60 000 fies who have never seen anything near your current rank. You are doing exceptionally well.

Thank you!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 29, 2024, 11:30
after a strong Monday the rest of the week was pretty bad,not even an Easter sale :(

I don't know if you noticed but there are 1,076,612 results for "Easter" AI only,already a million AI contents for Easter.

this is why I am not particularly convinced that investing a lot of time in AI content is a good idea in the long term,for now yes,but I think in a year at most I don't think I will produce any more AI content,then clearly I will see,it depends on the results,but with this mass production so fast,I believe that the real difference can only be made with real contents at the end of the day.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 29, 2024, 12:15
the numbers don't tell you anything about how much money you can make with a theme.

there are millions of files of everything - people, flowers, food, business, landscapes, tech, with or without ai.

and yet there are people who make reliable money every year.

the majority of content is just duplicates of duplicates, the number of people who actually make the effort to drill down into themes is tiny. they just sort any search by downloads and copy the first 3 pages.

i have seen people make reliable money just taking images of their garden and gardening work. but they do it reliably, add latin names to everything, their videos are very nicely done, the postprocessing is professional.

and while it is not a full time living, it is enough to pay the running costs of gardening equipment, seeds, earth...

others do that with their pet. first they create enough content so the pet literally feeds itself, then they expand what they do, also add family interacting, get pets from friends and suddenly they make a reliable add on income for the household.

etc...

the goal is to learn what customers like to buy from you, what you can reliably produce and then to just keep doing it until you have a few thousand good, very diverse files.

then your port will get bookmarked as a resource.

if you don't understand fashion, there is no real point to create fashion content just because a youtuber recommends it. or business people and high end teams if you don't understand the latest trends.

what sells best and very reliably, is authentic content.

either because it was taken with a camera on a specific location by someone who actually works in that field or it is ai but done by someone who understands the subject well.

for instance i spent many years working in traffic technology, so one of my ai projects will be to create useful content for that highly specialized market.

i also love good warm soups, so there is a recipe book ready and i am looking to team up with friends for small cooking shootings

etc...


the flood of ai is just like the flood of normal photos that comes in anyway.

it doesn't worry me.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on March 29, 2024, 14:40
after a strong Monday the rest of the week was pretty bad,not even an Easter sale :(

I don't know if you noticed but there are 1,076,612 results for "Easter" AI only,already a million AI contents for Easter.

this is why I am not particularly convinced that investing a lot of time in AI content is a good idea in the long term,for now yes,but I think in a year at most I don't think I will produce any more AI content,then clearly I will see,it depends on the results,but with this mass production so fast,I believe that the real difference can only be made with real contents at the end of the day.

Well, it's not as if the competition is getting smaller.

Yes, the majority of AI images are currently still garbage because it takes a lot of time to find good generators and diffusion models.
But the bar is definitely getting higher. Many former classic photo bestsellers from 5 to 10 years ago have been overtaken by exceptionally good AI images.

My strategy is looking for niches right from the start. Popular subjects are pure luck or one have to create extremely creative concepts, which would have little competition.

Easter, for example, is brutal.
You won't stand a chance with standard motifs. You have to combine Easter with other themes. Vacations, online shopping, promotional offers for workshops, fashion, lifestyle, etc.

In other words, what a creative director would have photoshopped manually from standard stock material in the past.

And you have to build up a very balanced portfolio with many themes.
Otherwise one have no chance nowdays.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 29, 2024, 14:51
"In other words, what a creative director would have photoshopped manually from standard stock material in the past"

Exactly this.

eta

just a brief moment in time, hopefully one day a normal value, maybe when I have 12 000 files on Adobe

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 30, 2024, 06:38
the numbers don't tell you anything about how much money you can make with a theme.

there are millions of files of everything - people, flowers, food, business, landscapes, tech, with or without ai.

and yet there are people who make reliable money every year.

the majority of content is just duplicates of duplicates, the number of people who actually make the effort to drill down into themes is tiny. they just sort any search by downloads and copy the first 3 pages.

i have seen people make reliable money just taking images of their garden and gardening work. but they do it reliably, add latin names to everything, their videos are very nicely done, the postprocessing is professional.

and while it is not a full time living, it is enough to pay the running costs of gardening equipment, seeds, earth...

others do that with their pet. first they create enough content so the pet literally feeds itself, then they expand what they do, also add family interacting, get pets from friends and suddenly they make a reliable add on income for the household.

etc...

the goal is to learn what customers like to buy from you, what you can reliably produce and then to just keep doing it until you have a few thousand good, very diverse files.

then your port will get bookmarked as a resource.

if you don't understand fashion, there is no real point to create fashion content just because a youtuber recommends it. or business people and high end teams if you don't understand the latest trends.

what sells best and very reliably, is authentic content.

either because it was taken with a camera on a specific location by someone who actually works in that field or it is ai but done by someone who understands the subject well.

for instance i spent many years working in traffic technology, so one of my ai projects will be to create useful content for that highly specialized market.

i also love good warm soups, so there is a recipe book ready and i am looking to team up with friends for small cooking shootings

etc...


the flood of ai is just like the flood of normal photos that comes in anyway.

it doesn't worry me.

yes and no  :)

I agree with almost everything but not quite everything,AI content is different,technology advances,today's content will probably be obsolete in a couple of years,for example.

going back to Easter as an example,there are 3,188,923 traditional contentsand already one million AI,how long did it take to reach 3 million Easter contents?decades,how much for a million AI?a year?that's a big difference!

I agree that specializing in a type of content,for example food,or gardens is certainly a winning strategy,I have a type of content in which I started specializing in February 2023,given that there aren't many on Adobe,and I will always continue to make this content the basis of my portfolio, while trying to do everything else as well.

AI content can certainly be sold but in my opinion it cannot represent the basis of a portfolio,only real content can make the difference.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 30, 2024, 06:48
after a strong Monday the rest of the week was pretty bad,not even an Easter sale :(

I don't know if you noticed but there are 1,076,612 results for "Easter" AI only,already a million AI contents for Easter.

this is why I am not particularly convinced that investing a lot of time in AI content is a good idea in the long term,for now yes,but I think in a year at most I don't think I will produce any more AI content,then clearly I will see,it depends on the results,but with this mass production so fast,I believe that the real difference can only be made with real contents at the end of the day.

Well, it's not as if the competition is getting smaller.

Yes, the majority of AI images are currently still garbage because it takes a lot of time to find good generators and diffusion models.
But the bar is definitely getting higher. Many former classic photo bestsellers from 5 to 10 years ago have been overtaken by exceptionally good AI images.

My strategy is looking for niches right from the start. Popular subjects are pure luck or one have to create extremely creative concepts, which would have little competition.

Easter, for example, is brutal.
You won't stand a chance with standard motifs. You have to combine Easter with other themes. Vacations, online shopping, promotional offers for workshops, fashion, lifestyle, etc.

In other words, what a creative director would have photoshopped manually from standard stock material in the past.

And you have to build up a very balanced portfolio with many themes.
Otherwise one have no chance nowdays.

yes and no the same :)

certainly,Easter is like photographing tomatoes,a very busy topic(there are 900,178 AI tomatoes and 4,627,028 real tomatoes)

a balanced portfolio is certainly fine,but it is better to specialize in one thing as a basis,while you can also do something else,if you succeed it is always better.

looking for niches is a winning strategy,we agree on this.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 30, 2024, 06:58
"AI content can certainly be sold but in my opinion it cannot represent the basis of a portfolio,only real content can make the difference."

What about ai that looks completely real?

:)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 30, 2024, 07:02
That is just the holiday/spring break

You will move back up when they are back at work, I will fall down because the holiday is over.

But again, it shows how dynamic the system is.

There are people with 60 000 fies who have never seen anything near your current rank. You are doing exceptionally well.

I also wanted to answer this,if there really is a portfolio with 60,000 contents that can't earn 200 usd a week,the explanation is very simple,either it doesn't have enough different content,it's full of similar and few subjects,that someone else with a 10 times smaller portfolio has 10 times more different subjects and therefore sells more.

or just hasn't had 60,000 pieces of content in a long time,because,from what I've seen,a portfolio with 5,000 contents that has been active for 15 years sells more than a portfolio with 60,000 contents that has been active for 5 years.

From what I understand,on Adobe time is one of the most important factors,a portfolio of 5000 contents that started in 2010 enjoys greater exposure than a portfolio with 60,000 contents active since 2020.

all of this is clearly just my conclusions from what I have seen,because obviously no one knows exactly how the sales system works,but if this is the case,i.e. that senior contributors earn more,I think it is right.

to be more clear,in my opinion it is right that a portfolio with 5000 contents active since 2010 earns more than a portfolio with 50,000 contents active since 2020,it is better that over time you earn more,and it doesn't depend only on how much content you have.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on March 30, 2024, 07:06
"AI content can certainly be sold but in my opinion it cannot represent the basis of a portfolio,only real content can make the difference."

What about ai that looks completely real?

:)

it is always content labeled with AI,it can seem as real as you want but it is always AI  :)

but for now it's fine,we are still in a phase where AI content is new and there are still many empty spaces,but I believe that in a year it will already be different.

in any case it can always be an addition to the real contents,but certainly not the basis.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 30, 2024, 18:42
sales slowing down drastically, still moving up a bit

pos 1930

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: PeteStock on March 31, 2024, 12:13
First time that I see a rank (I upload only videos)  8)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 31, 2024, 12:17
the rank is based on volume, not money, so you are probably earning a lot more than many others with your 5 sales

still, it is fun to see how it develops.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on March 31, 2024, 16:53
5 video sales for less than $20 is sad.  It used to be nearly $150 for 5 video sales. 
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: pancaketom on March 31, 2024, 17:47
I had a horrible week - like an xmas-new years week. 11 dl position 25900 (I'm usually around 15000) just under 3300 mostly LCV images.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on March 31, 2024, 19:15
very low sales but still a great rank, i guess when it is this slow I jump up again.

pos 1750

don't worry, next week I will go back down

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 01, 2024, 06:03
sales slowing down drastically, still moving up a bit

pos 1930

congratulations,an excellent result with only 4000 contents :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: HalfFull on April 01, 2024, 08:42
Broke top 500 lifetime rank 491 and holding steady around 200 weekly (189 at the moment).
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 01, 2024, 10:51
Whow, very impressive!!!

Single artist, or team production/family if I may ask?

Congratulations on all the hard work.

I find it encouraging that many people have good rankings as a single artist.

Gives me hope I can still rebuild a full time income from stock.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 01, 2024, 11:18
My weekly rank this morning: 32,600th  ;D

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: HalfFull on April 01, 2024, 17:02
Whow, very impressive!!!

Single artist, or team production/family if I may ask?

Congratulations on all the hard work.

I find it encouraging that many people have good rankings as a single artist.

Gives me hope I can still rebuild a full time income from stock.

Thanks… Just me, no one else or any help or use of AI.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 01, 2024, 17:49
That is really amazing.

I hope you make it into the top 100!

eta

my jouney will use ai. I am beginning to understand the appeal of midjourney, especially for people, not yet for illustrations

now i need to learn how to generate fresh faces, getting the same models as everyone else
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 02, 2024, 05:08
Whow, very impressive!!!

Single artist, or team production/family if I may ask?

Congratulations on all the hard work.

I find it encouraging that many people have good rankings as a single artist.

Gives me hope I can still rebuild a full time income from stock.

Thanks… Just me, no one else or any help or use of AI.

yes really impressive! :)
and how long have you been a contributor in Adobe Stock? and how much content do you have in your portfolio if I may ask?

if you make AI content you would sell a lot of it because you have excellent exposure,so it is much more likely that you will sell everything and therefore also AI.

However,I understand you,this AI content is a double-edged sword,on the one hand it is better to make it but on the other it can result in a waste of time,it is certainly better to make real content.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 02, 2024, 10:18
Broke top 500 lifetime rank 491 and holding steady around 200 weekly (189 at the moment).

Nice, what's your weekly earning with this position?
1k USD or more?
Would be interesting to know how the earnings are distributed among the top sellers.

How big is your portfolio? Would expect min. 30k images and videos.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: HalfFull on April 02, 2024, 13:16
Not a million miles away. 20k images and sales are distributed across my port… not just a handful of top sellers. I’ve been doing this type of work since 2010 probably 2013/14 with Adobe / Fotolia. No AI in port.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on April 02, 2024, 22:10
Not a million miles away. 20k images and sales are distributed across my port… not just a handful of top sellers. I’ve been doing this type of work since 2010 probably 2013/14 with Adobe / Fotolia. No AI in port.

Pretty good! :) Tips/strategies/recommendations on how to create a better selling/balanced portfolio?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 03, 2024, 02:42
Not a million miles away. 20k images and sales are distributed across my port… not just a handful of top sellers. I’ve been doing this type of work since 2010 probably 2013/14 with Adobe / Fotolia. No AI in port.

Thanks for the reply,it's interesting to know. :)

I think that from now on I will focus more on real content and much less on AI,I don't have much AI content for sale,but I can already see that it doesn't sell much,even because I don't have a good exposure yet,since my best weekly rank ever was 3210,which only happened once.

with AI there is too much competition and contents are easily replicable by others,and then the technology will improve and it will be even simpler.

I think that AI content was easier to sell until December,now it's already becoming different,so in a year it will probably be much worse.

The problem is not so much the money spent on Midjourney and other things for AI,because the money can be made again,but time,that is the most important resource that no one can ever give back!



Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 03, 2024, 06:16
On my way back down

pos 2240

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: HalfFull on April 03, 2024, 07:10
Not a million miles away. 20k images and sales are distributed across my port… not just a handful of top sellers. I’ve been doing this type of work since 2010 probably 2013/14 with Adobe / Fotolia. No AI in port.

Pretty good! :) Tips/strategies/recommendations on how to create a better selling/balanced portfolio?

I learned early on that if anyone is serious about making a career from this business, they should follow one simple rule. Do not divulge or give away details of what works for you including images that sell well. You have to treat it as a business and businesses do not provide, "Secrets of their success" to help their competitors take money from them. It sounds harsh but ultimately it will serve you well. Sorry if this sounds nasty but it's hard enough in this line of work without shooting yourself in the foot.

That said, I do enjoy teaching so when I retire, I would like to teach one or two people about how I did things. Not so much for money etc, just because I like the idea of passing something on.


Not a million miles away. 20k images and sales are distributed across my port… not just a handful of top sellers. I’ve been doing this type of work since 2010 probably 2013/14 with Adobe / Fotolia. No AI in port.

Thanks for the reply,it's interesting to know. :)

I think that from now on I will focus more on real content and much less on AI,I don't have much AI content for sale,but I can already see that it doesn't sell much,even because I don't have a good exposure yet,since my best weekly rank ever was 3210,which only happened once.

with AI there is too much competition and contents are easily replicable by others,and then the technology will improve and it will be even simpler.

I think that AI content was easier to sell until December,now it's already becoming different,so in a year it will probably be much worse.

The problem is not so much the money spent on Midjourney and other things for AI,because the money can be made again,but time,that is the most important resource that no one can ever give back!

AI or not AI, well... for me it wasn't so much a question of right or wrong, just what's right for me.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on April 03, 2024, 09:01
Quote
I learned early on that if anyone is serious about making a career from this business, they should follow one simple rule. Do not divulge or give away details of what works for you including images that sell well. You have to treat it as a business and businesses do not provide, "Secrets of their success" to help their competitors take money from them. It sounds harsh but ultimately it will serve you well. Sorry if this sounds nasty but it's hard enough in this line of work without shooting yourself in the foot.

That said, I do enjoy teaching so when I retire, I would like to teach one or two people about how I did things. Not so much for money etc, just because I like the idea of passing something on.

Well... you could be the first! You mean, you aren't one of those guys selling a "How I make five BILLION dollars a day on autopilot in my underwear, while only working 30 seconds sipping a cappucino - and 29 of those seconds are getting caffeinated - and these secrets can be YOURS - for only $29.95!!!" type of people???

Mmm. I do agree - so was in generic terms if you had certain tips, but if not - that is okay too.

So... next question. When do you retire? :D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Minsc on April 03, 2024, 09:55
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 03, 2024, 11:29
@HalfFull

It doesn't seem nasty,it's fully understandable.

I agree,in fact I learned everything I know here on microstockgroup and on the former SS forum,and online from other sources.

I'm not an expert,I've only been in microstock for 6 years,I like to help as little as I can,but I always try to stay generic.

The fact is that for many microstock is not the main source of income so they have no problem sharing.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on April 03, 2024, 11:33
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

Less than 10k/day? Hmm wow! :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 03, 2024, 11:35
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

wow this is great! :)  How long have you been an Adobe Stock contributor,if I may ask?

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 03, 2024, 11:42
On my way back down

pos 2240

you go down and I go up  :D but I'm always far from you rank,even though I have more content than you,I've been on Adobe Stock for much less time than you.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 03, 2024, 15:56
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

Wow!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on April 03, 2024, 19:19
Not a million miles away. 20k images and sales are distributed across my port… not just a handful of top sellers. I’ve been doing this type of work since 2010 probably 2013/14 with Adobe / Fotolia. No AI in port.

Pretty good! :) Tips/strategies/recommendations on how to create a better selling/balanced portfolio?

I learned early on that if anyone is serious about making a career from this business, they should follow one simple rule. Do not divulge or give away details of what works for you including images that sell well. You have to treat it as a business and businesses do not provide, "Secrets of their success" to help their competitors take money from them. It sounds harsh but ultimately it will serve you well. Sorry if this sounds nasty but it's hard enough in this line of work without shooting yourself in the foot.

That said, I do enjoy teaching so when I retire, I would like to teach one or two people about how I did things. Not so much for money etc, just because I like the idea of passing something on.

That's the best advice!!!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 03, 2024, 22:27
This is the first time that I don’t have a bestseller (all suddenly died out) and sales are cut in more than half!!! I didn’t realize how much I rely on my bestsellers.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 03, 2024, 22:38

That said, I do enjoy teaching so when I retire, I would like to teach one or two people about how I did things. Not so much for money etc, just because I like the idea of passing something on.


It’s difficult to retire if you enjoy to create. Especially if you are good at it and success comes fairly easy. Part time is a wonderful option to still use your talent. It’s so enjoyable to see your work sell.
That’s why I don’t upload hundreds of images. I’m done with being efficient and streamlined, now I enjoy creative process and little rewards
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 03, 2024, 23:55
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

Congratulations on your hard work!!!

No need to share details, I think it is already very helpful to know that such a position can indeed be reached by a single artist.

I always thought the top 100 was for large studio/team producers only. The only person I know in that level started out as a single artist but had progressed to working more as an art director and has people working for him, some full time, some on work for hire basis.

I do believe in sharing helpful information with peers and it can be done without reveailing best selling content.

Plus the algos make copying sometimes harder than people think. I know many producers who did a ton of seasonal content with ai, but get few sales, while my christmas season was quite good. But I have really, really old files that have probably accumulated in many galeries over the 10 years I didn‘t upload and these are the ones that started bringing in the money again. The ai stuff also sold, but less than old files revived.

For me I see it with my ai people, while they are slowly starting to sell, if I just do carrots on white background I will have better sales with that.

And if I do that with my camera, the carrots can go everywhere.

However, if I am consistent with my ai people uploads, then I am sure in 3-4 years they will also get good sales, like anything isolated or my greeting cards.

Same for illustrations. It is a new medium for me, there is ZERO algo track record. I have uploaded a lot of seasonal illustrations but sales are very, very slow. And sometimes very unexpected, I am actually having „artsy“ files sell. Done in watercolor or oil painting style.

So my first 3000 illustrations will be test subjects, trying many different niches and many, many different art styles.

Then gradually the customers will tell me what they like and I will make more of that.

But if I ever wanted to got for the top 100, I would certainly need 30k plus files.

I do a lot of research, but wouldn‘t know how to do that with less than 10k even if I could identify 10k top selling concepts. Gallery uptake by clients is a very slow process. Having instant best sellers is very rare for me.

There is also the time factor, I want to grow my income over the next 2-3 years, not over 20.

Roughly 60% of what i upload is still experimental, with ai even higher, because I am testing a lot of new things.

Thank you to anyone in top levels sharing ranks and port sizes.

For newbies it should help them understand that stock needs a ton of research and is not a slot machine where you throw random files in and money comes out.

The money is related to usefulness for clients not overall random content port size.


Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on April 04, 2024, 02:37
Portfolio size does not necessarily seem to matter... 30k/40k files does not necessarily 'guarantee' one a top spot, especially if say it is 30k pictures of bananas :P

One thing I've noticed is it seems some very (relatively speaking) "small" portfolios for whatever reason - have a few 'best sellers' that take off like wildfire... Lol obviously if I knew what the 'magic formula' was- I just focus on producing those bestsellers :)

And then I suppose there are some that are difficult to recreate... yes, "ai" (its not real "ai", its basically copying and blending) - is getting better at stealing content & rehashing/blending it... but - definitely not "perfect"... There was one video (I think someone posted here, or maybe I saw it while looking at other things) - where I guess a woman was saying she made $8k from a single image... She shared it - and it was a very good picture of a baby under a white blanket... just happened to have the right expression, right lighting, etc and resonated with a lot of people... Now the "ai" could try and steal that - but it wouldn't be the same...

And then also - I think in some ways images sell in "different" ways... I.e., if people see that baby image, they want "that" image for their campaigns, etc... so that probably also helps propel some sales too...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 04, 2024, 03:23
On my way back down

pos 2240

you go down and I go up  :D but I'm always far from you rank,even though I have more content than you,I've been on Adobe Stock for much less time than you.

I don't believe it is the time factor, which is relevant to be pushed up by Adobe.
I think it is rather a well balanced mix of real photos and AI images that is promoted by Adobe.

A good example is the following portfolio (although he steals a lot of ideas from other contributors)
https://stock.adobe.com/de/contributor/201195540/igor-link
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 04, 2024, 03:37
I have seen a lot of these images on midjourney, but not sure if they were all from the same creator.

That is the thing with ai, if it is easy to find on midjourney, there might be thousands of people doing the exact same thing.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 04, 2024, 04:49
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

Congratulations on your hard work!!!

No need to share details, I think it is already very helpful to know that such a position can indeed be reached by a single artist.

I always thought the top 100 was for large studio/team producers only. The only person I know in that level started out as a single artist but had progressed to working more as an art director and has people working for him, some full time, some on work for hire basis.

I do believe in sharing helpful information with peers and it can be done without reveailing best selling content.

Plus the algos make copying sometimes harder than people think. I know many producers who did a ton of seasonal content with ai, but get few sales, while my christmas season was quite good. But I have really, really old files that have probably accumulated in many galeries over the 10 years I didn‘t upload and these are the ones that started bringing in the money again. The ai stuff also sold, but less than old files revived.

For me I see it with my ai people, while they are slowly starting to sell, if I just do carrots on white background I will have better sales with that.

And if I do that with my camera, the carrots can go everywhere.

However, if I am consistent with my ai people uploads, then I am sure in 3-4 years they will also get good sales, like anything isolated or my greeting cards.

Same for illustrations. It is a new medium for me, there is ZERO algo track record. I have uploaded a lot of seasonal illustrations but sales are very, very slow. And sometimes very unexpected, I am actually having „artsy“ files sell. Done in watercolor or oil painting style.

So my first 3000 illustrations will be test subjects, trying many different niches and many, many different art styles.

Then gradually the customers will tell me what they like and I will make more of that.

But if I ever wanted to got for the top 100, I would certainly need 30k plus files.

I do a lot of research, but wouldn‘t know how to do that with less than 10k even if I could identify 10k top selling concepts. Gallery uptake by clients is a very slow process. Having instant best sellers is very rare for me.

There is also the time factor, I want to grow my income over the next 2-3 years, not over 20.

Roughly 60% of what i upload is still experimental, with ai even higher, because I am testing a lot of new things.

Thank you to anyone in top levels sharing ranks and port sizes.

For newbies it should help them understand that stock needs a ton of research and is not a slot machine where you throw random files in and money comes out.

The money is related to usefulness for clients not overall random content port size.

I don't think it would be a good idea with your current portfolio.
I rather have the feeling that Adobe penalizes spammer portfolios heavily and lowers the ranking.

I would always test experiments with a new account (multiple are allowed) to avoid your main portfolio crashing.

I would even go so far as to create a separate account for each type of image (interior, fashion,
seasonal content, etc.).
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 04, 2024, 05:16
Never heard of people having multiple accounts for different content types, not sure if that is even allowed on Adobe. I am only aware to open a new account when you are over 1 million files or an account for a special media group - only video, only ai

It would be crazy difficult to reach a good ranking with several portfolios, each has to work itself up by itself?!

I would never be able to create enough content.

I have no intention of spamming Adobe, I usually upload around 50 files a week, trying very hard to increase that.

There is no chance of me having 30k files on Adobe in 2 years.

But for a full time living from ONLY Adobe I would probably need 30k files.

But there are other agencies and other media types.

So to reach a full time income over 3-4 years is certainly possible with the right content.

But not only ai and certainly not only Adobe.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on April 04, 2024, 05:29
Never heard of people having multiple accounts for different content types, not sure if that is even allowed on Adobe. I am only aware to open a new account when you are over 1 million files or an account for a special media group - only video, only ai

It would be crazy difficult to reach a good ranking with several portfolios, each has to work itself up by itself?!

I would never be able to create enough content.

I have no intention of spamming Adobe, I usually upload around 50 files a week, trying very hard to increase that.

There is no chance of me having 30k files on Adobe in 2 years.

But for a full time living from ONLY Adobe I would probably need 30k files.

But there are other agencies and other media types.

So to reach a full time income over 3-4 years is certainly possible with the right content.

But not only ai and certainly not only Adobe.

Don't think it's worth having multiple accounts.

Personally now I am on 3k files on Adobe. But planning to have 10k images and 1 k in videos by end of this year.

Will focus more on macro and aerial shots, maybe add some FPV and time-lapses.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: synthetick on April 04, 2024, 05:35
Multiple accounts used to be freely allowed, but when people started using them to bypass upload limits new rules were introduced. You can have multiple accounts if you want to independently track different asset types, for example vectors versus photos, or Gen. AI versus non-Gen. AI, but you cannot have multiple accounts for the purpose of bypassing upload limits. If you have Gen. AI in more than one account that will be considered as trying to bypass upload limits and you risk having your accounts suspended or terminated.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 04, 2024, 05:45
On my way back down

pos 2240

you go down and I go up  :D but I'm always far from you rank,even though I have more content than you,I've been on Adobe Stock for much less time than you.

I don't believe it is the time factor, which is relevant to be pushed up by Adobe.
I think it is rather a well balanced mix of real photos and AI images that is promoted by Adobe.

A good example is the following portfolio (although he steals a lot of ideas from other contributors)
https://stock.adobe.com/de/contributor/201195540/igor-link

but regardless of whether your portfolio is promoted or not,over time sales increase,so time remains the most important factor,as it should be.

a portfolio of 5000 contents active since 2010 earns more than a portfolio of 20,000 contents active since 2020,assuming that neither portfolio is promoted by Adobe.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: synthetick on April 04, 2024, 05:59
Being "active" is an important factor in visibility on most sites.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Faustvasea on April 04, 2024, 06:00
Multiple accounts used to be freely allowed, but when people started using them to bypass upload limits new rules were introduced. You can have multiple accounts if you want to independently track different asset types, for example vectors versus photos, or Gen. AI versus non-Gen. AI, but you cannot have multiple accounts for the purpose of bypassing upload limits. If you have Gen. AI in more than one account that will be considered as trying to bypass upload limits and you risk having your accounts suspended or terminated.

Is that still allowed nowadays? Interesting how practical it is.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 04, 2024, 06:41
On my way back down

pos 2240

you go down and I go up  :D but I'm always far from you rank,even though I have more content than you,I've been on Adobe Stock for much less time than you.

I don't believe it is the time factor, which is relevant to be pushed up by Adobe.
I think it is rather a well balanced mix of real photos and AI images that is promoted by Adobe.

A good example is the following portfolio (although he steals a lot of ideas from other contributors)
https://stock.adobe.com/de/contributor/201195540/igor-link

but regardless of whether your portfolio is promoted or not,over time sales increase,so time remains the most important factor,as it should be.

a portfolio of 5000 contents active since 2010 earns more than a portfolio of 20,000 contents active since 2020,assuming that neither portfolio is promoted by Adobe.

I would say this is more an image ranking subject.
There are long-established contributors who are still living off their old bestsellers, which have climbed a good ranking over the years because there was less competition back then.

If one had crap back then 15 years ago it won't help you with new AI stuff.

Several accounts are allowed and I'm currently testing with a new one for other various content.
But there is a review limit of 50 images at the beginning.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 04, 2024, 07:06
Well, it will be interesting to hear how you fare with several ports.

You have to overcome the upload limits, then gradually rise in rank to over 10 000 again.

I cannot produce enough content for that, but luck with. your project.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: HalfFull on April 04, 2024, 11:31

That said, I do enjoy teaching so when I retire, I would like to teach one or two people about how I did things. Not so much for money etc, just because I like the idea of passing something on.


It’s difficult to retire if you enjoy to create. Especially if you are good at it and success comes fairly easy. Part time is a wonderful option to still use your talent. It’s so enjoyable to see your work sell.
That’s why I don’t upload hundreds of images. I’m done with being efficient and streamlined, now I enjoy creative process and little rewards

Very true. I do the same now. For me, retiring wouldn’t be a complete stop, just focus on areas I enjoy the most when I have time. Another 10years of gradual wind down!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 04, 2024, 15:16
I had several digitaly-drawn bestsellers that sold like wildfire , but each of them died just as suddenly. Plus, I only had 2 bestsellers at a time that sell great

I’m starting to doubt that one can rely on bestsellers long term post 2021?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 04, 2024, 16:14
I have read several times here about "bestsellers". Now I'm curious as to what a "bestseller" at AS actually is.
500 downloads? 1,000 downloads? 2,500 downloads? 5,000 downloads? Or even more?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: spike on April 04, 2024, 18:55
I always thought the top 100 was for large studio/team producers only. The only person I know in that level started out as a single artist but had progressed to working more as an art director and has people working for him, some full time, some on work for hire basis.

No, I was among the top 100 in around 2017/2018. But then I kinda moved on from stock and uploaded very rarely. Now I'm around 600 (both weekly and lifetime) and I have a feeling I could crack the top 500 if I made a bit more images. But I don't.

Anyway, it's doable. Good luck to you all!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Minsc on April 04, 2024, 20:08
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

wow this is great! :)  How long have you been an Adobe Stock contributor,if I may ask?

I started submitting in 2016.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 04, 2024, 21:24
I have read several times here about "bestsellers". Now I'm curious as to what a "bestseller" at AS actually is.
500 downloads? 1,000 downloads? 2,500 downloads? 5,000 downloads? Or even more?

I have one file with over 10k lifetime sales.

But I would consider a file that sells at least 2-3 times a week to be a reliable bestseller, or around 100 sales a year.

The ideal bestsellers is something that gets sales nearly every day.

I do have seasonal bestsellers that can sell 5-10 a day in the season, but then die off quickly when the event is over. And that is usually just for 1-2 weeks very close to the holiday event.

But the most important - can the bestseller lead to more sales of the series? Then the file becomes really valuable.

It is the download of a complete series or at least 3 files at the same time that makes a real bestseller for me.

A lead file that can entice customers to look what else I have on the subject.


Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 05, 2024, 04:03
I have read several times here about "bestsellers". Now I'm curious as to what a "bestseller" at AS actually is.
500 downloads? 1,000 downloads? 2,500 downloads? 5,000 downloads? Or even more?

I have one file with over 10k lifetime sales.

But I would consider a file that sells at least 2-3 times a week to be a reliable bestseller, or around 100 sales a year.

The ideal bestsellers is something that gets sales nearly every day.

I do have seasonal bestsellers that can sell 5-10 a day in the season, but then die off quickly when the event is over. And that is usually just for 1-2 weeks very close to the holiday event.

But the most important - can the bestseller lead to more sales of the series? Then the file becomes really valuable.

It is the download of a complete series or at least 3 files at the same time that makes a real bestseller for me.

A lead file that can entice customers to look what else I have on the subject.

10k sales with one image is dam* good.
But on the other hand one is quite fragile if the bestseller drys out.

Ideally the portfolio should be (like a financial portfolio) as well balanced as possible.
And as you said even more ideally the buyers would buy more images from a series when they see the leading bestseller.

Currently you can't produce accurate image series with AI.
But probably with Midjourney v7/v8 or Stable Diffusion XL 4 it will be possible.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 05, 2024, 04:12
I am still in the early stages of learning about midjourney. While you cannot get a series with a specific model you can get a theme of files with similar vibe, colors, lighting.

Midjourney people files still need a lot processing, I get a lot of great looking files, then on close up discover all kinds of issues with broken teeth, weird fingers growing out of a neck, strange details on clothes. The experssions are better than on stable, but far from perfect.

But the biggest challenge is to get faces that not everybody has. It feels like Mj just has 10 faces to choose from for a given age and ethnic type.

I am also trying to do more with Adobe and next week I have my first real shooting with a camera again.

But like I said before, the main focus for this year will be ai illustrations and to learn what I can offer that people will then like to buy. Every illustration sale, is a sale I would not have had otherwise.

They are selling very, very slowly, even the holiday files sell slow. But I believe it will pay off eventually, once the initial files have laid their roots across the algos, which will probably take 3 years.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 05, 2024, 05:33
I have read several times here about "bestsellers". Now I'm curious as to what a "bestseller" at AS actually is.
500 downloads? 1,000 downloads? 2,500 downloads? 5,000 downloads? Or even more?

I have one file with over 10k lifetime sales.

But I would consider a file that sells at least 2-3 times a week to be a reliable bestseller, or around 100 sales a year.

The ideal bestsellers is something that gets sales nearly every day.

I do have seasonal bestsellers that can sell 5-10 a day in the season, but then die off quickly when the event is over. And that is usually just for 1-2 weeks very close to the holiday event.

But the most important - can the bestseller lead to more sales of the series? Then the file becomes really valuable.

It is the download of a complete series or at least 3 files at the same time that makes a real bestseller for me.

A lead file that can entice customers to look what else I have on the subject.

More than 10 k downloads for a single image on AS alone is a highlight. The image must be one of the best files on AS. The top sellers used to be displayed on fotolia. I remember, for example, the images by ioannis kounadeas, some of which had 6 or 7 k downloads over 10 years ago. But then they were copied without end.

Congratulations anyway - that's really great!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 05, 2024, 05:50
10k over all agencies, sorry. Most of the sales were on istock. It is an old files with now endless copies.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 05, 2024, 06:56
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

wow this is great! :)  How long have you been an Adobe Stock contributor,if I may ask?

I started submitting in 2016.

Thank you,therefore for less than 10 years and already among the top 100 with less than 10k contents,it's incredible! :)

It's also very hard to believe,but ok anything can be! :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 05, 2024, 07:48
So, back down in the real world.

pos 3450, 4300 files

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 05, 2024, 08:13
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

wow this is great! :)  How long have you been an Adobe Stock contributor,if I may ask?

I started submitting in 2016.

Thank you,therefore for less than 10 years and already among the top 100 with less than 10k contents,it's incredible! :)

It's also very hard to believe,but ok anything can be! :)

I believe that. I have seen some small on banner graphics specialized portfolios, which seem to consist of almost all bestsellers.
Back in 2014/2015 before Adobe Stock for example Anja Kaiser was extemely pushed with her vector graphics by Fotolia.
She has a sell ratio of almost 99% of her portfolio I believe. And some illustrations were featured for almost years.
https://stock.adobe.com/de/contributor/200564940/anja-kaiser

But today she seems not to be pushed anymore by Adobe Stock. So that I don't believe only keywords and image rankings matter.

Another portfolios, who probably still are doing very well:
https://stock.adobe.com/de/contributor/200905841/floydine
https://stock.adobe.com/de/contributor/202483008/romolo-tavani

Actually one should stop spamming by generating thousands of AI images but start to create some good basis material with AI and then use Photoshop further to add more details, lighting, effects, etc. This is probably a better time investment.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: wds on April 05, 2024, 08:13
I am still in the early stages of learning about midjourney. While you cannot get a series with a specific model you can get a theme of files with similar vibe, colors, lighting.

Midjourney people files still need a lot processing, I get a lot of great looking files, then on close up discover all kinds of issues with broken teeth, weird fingers growing out of a neck, strange details on clothes. The experssions are better than on stable, but far from perfect.

But the biggest challenge is to get faces that not everybody has. It feels like Mj just has 10 faces to choose from for a given age and ethnic type.

I am also trying to do more with Adobe and next week I have my first real shooting with a camera again.

But like I said before, the main focus for this year will be ai illustrations and to learn what I can offer that people will then like to buy. Every illustration sale, is a sale I would not have had otherwise.

They are selling very, very slowly, even the holiday files sell slow. But I believe it will pay off eventually, once the initial files have laid their roots across the algos, which will probably take 3 years.

Regarding "number of faces", this is one thing I don't get. I have also seen on Firefly where faces get almost repeated. With all the vast quantity of images these tools are trained on, how is it that they get stuck with a limited number of "faces"? Is it some kind of "flaw in the logic" of how they work? Is it a bug? If you take human artist, say painter, they don't repeat faces in their work, yet AI seems to do that. Maybe it's some kind of short cut in the algorithms which leeds to this? Just curious.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 05, 2024, 08:22
I am still in the early stages of learning about midjourney. While you cannot get a series with a specific model you can get a theme of files with similar vibe, colors, lighting.

Midjourney people files still need a lot processing, I get a lot of great looking files, then on close up discover all kinds of issues with broken teeth, weird fingers growing out of a neck, strange details on clothes. The experssions are better than on stable, but far from perfect.

But the biggest challenge is to get faces that not everybody has. It feels like Mj just has 10 faces to choose from for a given age and ethnic type.

I am also trying to do more with Adobe and next week I have my first real shooting with a camera again.

But like I said before, the main focus for this year will be ai illustrations and to learn what I can offer that people will then like to buy. Every illustration sale, is a sale I would not have had otherwise.

They are selling very, very slowly, even the holiday files sell slow. But I believe it will pay off eventually, once the initial files have laid their roots across the algos, which will probably take 3 years.

Regarding "number of faces", this is one thing I don't get. I have also seen on Firefly where faces get almost repeated. With all the vast quantity of images these tools are trained on, how is it that they get stuck with a limited number of "faces"? Is it some kind of "flaw in the logic" of how they work? Is it a bug? If you take human artist, say painter, they don't repeat faces in their work, yet AI seems to do that. Maybe it's some kind of short cut in the algorithms which leeds to this? Just curious.

No it is not really a bug. Or somehow you could tell it but it is technical stuff. Because of the diffusion process you get a smoothing as mean result
out from million of images.

You should try to use very detailed prompts with character describing (e.g. age, ethnicity, hair color, eyes color, etc.) instead of a generic prompt like "a portrait of a beautiful woman". But it won't fix all problems.
But Midjourney has some problems with narrow lips for example. You will get always full collagen filled lips on females.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 05, 2024, 09:03
I think the ai companies created a batch of high quality people as basic avatars and if you want something different you have to be very specific.

It is the only explanation that makes sense to me why thousands of people keep generating the exact same faces.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Infinity on April 05, 2024, 13:04
So, back down in the real world.

pos 3450, 4300 files

hi! If these are your numbers then how did you manage to make into Recent top sellers for this week in the Illustrations section?  :o I don't get it
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 05, 2024, 14:13
So, back down in the real world.

pos 3450, 4300 files

hi! If these are your numbers then how did you manage to make into Recent top sellers for this week in the Illustrations section?  :o I don't get it

On Adobe always the last week is shown and not the current one. Cobalt's last week was pretty good.
But yeah I wonder still also a little bit. Her position ranking was under 1000 if I'm not wrong.
So either almost everyone with a better ranking was a photo seller or Adobe does not show the real cash cows with rankings < 100.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Infinity on April 05, 2024, 14:38
So, back down in the real world.

pos 3450, 4300 files

hi! If these are your numbers then how did you manage to make into Recent top sellers for this week in the Illustrations section?  :o I don't get it

On Adobe always the last week is shown and not the current one. Cobalt's last week was pretty good.
But yeah I wonder still also a little bit. Her position ranking was under 1000 if I'm not wrong.
So either almost everyone with a better ranking was a photo seller or Adobe does not show the real cash cows with rankings < 100.

Well going with Adobe's rules...
Quote
For each asset type we generate a list of 200 contributors who made the most sales in the previous week, only considering their uploads from the past six months. Then, we order the list based on each contributor’s uploads/sales ratio, and the top 10 contributors on this list are featured as “Recent top sellers”.
... I don't think it's possible to get into weekly top sellers being anywhere between position 1k-2k. something very strange here
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 05, 2024, 18:15
So, back down in the real world.

pos 3450, 4300 files

hi! If these are your numbers then how did you manage to make into Recent top sellers for this week in the Illustrations section?  :o I don't get it

On Adobe always the last week is shown and not the current one. Cobalt's last week was pretty good.
But yeah I wonder still also a little bit. Her position ranking was under 1000 if I'm not wrong.
So either almost everyone with a better ranking was a photo seller or Adobe does not show the real cash cows with rankings < 100.

Well going with Adobe's rules...
Quote
For each asset type we generate a list of 200 contributors who made the most sales in the previous week, only considering their uploads from the past six months. Then, we order the list based on each contributor’s uploads/sales ratio, and the top 10 contributors on this list are featured as “Recent top sellers”.
... I don't think it's possible to get into weekly top sellers being anywhere between position 1k-2k. something very strange here

Yeah, it is a mystery which criterion Adobe uses for featuring of best selling contributors.
Probably they consider the portfolio size in relation to the sales. Would somehow make sense.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Minsc on April 05, 2024, 20:22
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

wow this is great! :)  How long have you been an Adobe Stock contributor,if I may ask?

I started submitting in 2016.

Thank you,therefore for less than 10 years and already among the top 100 with less than 10k contents,it's incredible! :)

It's also very hard to believe,but ok anything can be! :)

One way I can describe my portfolio is that is very practical and useful.

I've seen my work all over, including in websites & YouTube. I've even seen my work in food packaging and local farm ads.

I can never reveal my portfolio for obvious reason, but I can assure you that it's very real.

I started creating microstock in 2015 and I joined this forum in 2016. I just had a lot of skills and a lot knowledge from many different industries, including marketing, design, finance, publishing and technology. A lot of my skills were transferable into Microstock because I knew what all these industries were looking for.

You can say that I found a secret formula and I figured out what different industries need. My bestsellers are not artistic or fancy. They are just incredibly practical.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Minsc on April 05, 2024, 20:33
Top 100 weekly, top 100 lifetime, less than 10k.

Congratulations on your hard work!!!

No need to share details, I think it is already very helpful to know that such a position can indeed be reached by a single artist.

I always thought the top 100 was for large studio/team producers only. The only person I know in that level started out as a single artist but had progressed to working more as an art director and has people working for him, some full time, some on work for hire basis.

I do believe in sharing helpful information with peers and it can be done without reveailing best selling content.

Plus the algos make copying sometimes harder than people think. I know many producers who did a ton of seasonal content with ai, but get few sales, while my christmas season was quite good. But I have really, really old files that have probably accumulated in many galeries over the 10 years I didn‘t upload and these are the ones that started bringing in the money again. The ai stuff also sold, but less than old files revived.

For me I see it with my ai people, while they are slowly starting to sell, if I just do carrots on white background I will have better sales with that.

And if I do that with my camera, the carrots can go everywhere.

However, if I am consistent with my ai people uploads, then I am sure in 3-4 years they will also get good sales, like anything isolated or my greeting cards.

Same for illustrations. It is a new medium for me, there is ZERO algo track record. I have uploaded a lot of seasonal illustrations but sales are very, very slow. And sometimes very unexpected, I am actually having „artsy“ files sell. Done in watercolor or oil painting style.

So my first 3000 illustrations will be test subjects, trying many different niches and many, many different art styles.

Then gradually the customers will tell me what they like and I will make more of that.

But if I ever wanted to got for the top 100, I would certainly need 30k plus files.

I do a lot of research, but wouldn‘t know how to do that with less than 10k even if I could identify 10k top selling concepts. Gallery uptake by clients is a very slow process. Having instant best sellers is very rare for me.

There is also the time factor, I want to grow my income over the next 2-3 years, not over 20.

Roughly 60% of what i upload is still experimental, with ai even higher, because I am testing a lot of new things.

Thank you to anyone in top levels sharing ranks and port sizes.

For newbies it should help them understand that stock needs a ton of research and is not a slot machine where you throw random files in and money comes out.

The money is related to usefulness for clients not overall random content port size.

Thanks for your understanding. I've been on this forum for 8 years. I dropped a lot of helpful advice early on. I used to post a lot more, but I've been just lurking in the last few years. If people want to know what I shared, they're free to go check out my old postings.

One thing I can reveal is that I don't use any keyword tools. I keyword every submission manually and I put effort into ordering all my keywords. I put work into early and now many of my images are at the top of search results.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 05, 2024, 20:50
So, back down in the real world.

pos 3450, 4300 files

hi! If these are your numbers then how did you manage to make into Recent top sellers for this week in the Illustrations section?  :o I don't get it

Thank you for pointing that out, I had no idea!

i briefly made it to around 1740, and I had uploaded a lot of easter spring illustrations in the weeks before. They got some good uptake on the easter week-end itself, but it has all dropped drastically now.

There will be many people with more sales than me, but probably the ratio for the content uploaded in the last few weeks to sales was probably better in my case.

The bestseller list is not a list of people with a total number of bestselling content, then we would see the same portfolios every week.

This is a great surprise, hopefully I will pick up some longterm customers. Although now sales of illustrations have crashed.

@minsc

I agree on careful manual keywording. I do it myself and try very hard to order them correctly. But you are obviously also uploading great content.

It does take time for files to move up into good positions, sometimes years to finally have a file on the first 3 pages of a keyword search.

But the slow uptake is a good thing, it makes it more difficult for the copycats.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 05, 2024, 21:09
There are some really interesting ports on that illustration list.

Absolutely love this one

https://stock.adobe.com/de/contributor/207065927/Oleksii

I have been experimenting with oil painting style, but mine never get a good uptake. But i haven‘t ujploaded a lot of flowers, perhaps I should just go for it.

The list also always has new ports with just over 1000 downloads, sometimes the ports are quite small.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 05, 2024, 21:11
I was on top seller list several time with very few png files and position about 800 - because it’s calculated how efficient, how much sales you have compared to how many files you have. (Not how much $ you earn) I had several best sellers that took off (and then died) so my earnings were very efficient compared to how many images I had. (How many copies of hand drawn png can one do? Might as well draw a different image in that time)

Now, I have 28 pages and make more $, but diluted my portfolio on purpose, since I don’t want to be featured on a top sellers list - as Matt said: “you earned bragging rights” but Customers don’t see it, reviewers don’t see it, search engine doesn’t see it, but copycats do!!! Sorry, I see no upside to it.

However, I know that if someone uploads many variations of the same image or does mainly copycats - their portfolio gets marked down in searches. You have to create something new for Adobe to push your images in search.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 05, 2024, 21:21
There are some really interesting ports on that illustration list.

Absolutely love this one

https://stock.adobe.com/de/contributor/207065927/Oleksii

I have been experimenting with oil painting style, but mine never get a good uptake. But i haven‘t ujploaded a lot of flowers, perhaps I should just go for it.

The list also always has new ports with just over 1000 downloads, sometimes the ports are quite small.

Congratulations on making a top sellers list!

I tried flowers early on, very few got sales, I think there is already too many of them out there. Unless you can come up with something new. Only 2 files got 40 and then 20 downloads, nothing special, don’t understand how they got sales while others didn’t at all. I spent a week on them, earned $50 🤣
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 05, 2024, 22:09
I disagree on being featured as useless. When I was featured during the christmas season, the week I was on that list I had a push of nearly 40% more sales compared to the week before.

So please Adobe, keep featuring me.

However this week I dropped down drastically inspite of being featured, I attribute this to not having enough interesting content for the next 3 months. But without being featured, perhaps it would have been a lot worse?

I am new to illustrations, so this means I am doing something right.

As my portfolio grows, the chances of getting featured drops.

Seems like a good system overall.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on April 05, 2024, 22:49
Quote
Regarding "number of faces", this is one thing I don't get. I have also seen on Firefly where faces get almost repeated. With all the vast quantity of images these tools are trained on, how is it that they get stuck with a limited number of "faces"? Is it some kind of "flaw in the logic" of how they work? Is it a bug? If you take human artist, say painter, they don't repeat faces in their work, yet AI seems to do that. Maybe it's some kind of short cut in the algorithms which leeds to this? Just curious.

It's because... and many people still don't seem to get this - the "ai" isn't actually "ai" - it's essentially just stealing billions of images, and "blending" them together. It doesn't "understand" what you are asking - it just looks for certain tags (i.e., "black person", "white person") associated with the images it's stolen, "blends" them together, to make a black/white/etc person... that's greatly simplified (because it first creates "models" of the stolen material), but that's basically it.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 06, 2024, 01:03
It creates models from the stolen material.

That is what I mean. They have created some people avatars that will give good quality and which is why so many of us get the exact same faces.

Getting a new face is not so easy.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 06, 2024, 07:39
10k over all agencies, sorry.

Ah, okay, in that case I can join the 10k club!  :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 06, 2024, 07:40
10k over all agencies, sorry.

Ah, okay, in that case I can join the 10k with one image club!  :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 06, 2024, 12:40
Double post, don’t know how to delete
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 06, 2024, 12:41
I disagree on being featured as useless. When I was featured during the christmas season, the week I was on that list I had a push of nearly 40% more sales compared to the week before.
3 times when I was featured, my sales dropped those weeks, that’s the reason why I asked Matt how featured affects you. The only difference I personally felt was that my images got accepted much faster after being featured.

I saw some contributors with a million downloads on top sellers list, so it’s possible to be featured even with a big portfolio.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 06, 2024, 13:09
Well, now I am down to 4020. But...it might be much worse without being featured. So I am still honored to be on the list.

Also not really worried about copycats, because i still have no clue what really sells in illustrations.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 06, 2024, 16:57
Also not really worried about copycats, because i still have no clue what really sells in illustrations.
It’s always a surprise for me what exactly will sell: it’s not difficult to guess the subject, but what will take off is, at times my favorite designs don’t sell or the worst one on the same subject will. I’ve read that there is some kind of rating that reviewers can assign. Don’t worry about this week, it’s tax season, you’ll probably come up again soon. (Matt wrote before that if you got featured on top sellers, you have a good idea of what customers want. I believe it’s a feeling that is difficult to put to words, but if you have it, you’ll produce best designs again and again)

One of my bestsellers became a regular seller and that’s a big hit for me, I’m also down a lot.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 06, 2024, 23:46
I think it was the really slow week of both easter and spring break that got me on the list. Yes i had sales for Easter, but not as much as I had hoped. If that was enough to put me on the list, then it must have been really slow.

I am experimenting a lot with illustrations. Seeing a port with mostly flower oil pointings get on the list, means I should also upload all the things I just did for myself, but didn't bother uploading. Who would buy flower paintings? But apparently many people do.

It will take at least 3 years and 3k illustrations to get a better understanding for that market.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 07, 2024, 17:30
I'm currently browsing on Midjourney's Discrod Channel to find some interesting prompts, which I would use as basis and modify on my own.
Found several persons using the describe function with some Adobe Stock thumbnails to generate prompts.
Lol, people are just copycats.

Is someone here using this function too?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 07, 2024, 20:39
Tried it with my own files to check how my images are described and what those prompts then create. Thankfully the resulting files were very different. Same genre but not copies.

I also test my image descriptions and titles to see if they create duplicates then modify my titles to be more generic if the results are too close.

I keep browsing their public explore gallery for interesting prompts, then modify them for my own purposes. I never go for copies, I always want the style and vibe for something very different, often a different genre altogether.

But there is a lot to learn about lighting, mood, composition directions. The more specific, the better the results. My descriptions are becoming longer and longer.

eta

now dropped to 5180

that is a low I have not seen in a very long time

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 08, 2024, 02:30
Tried it with my own files to check how my images are described and what those prompts then create. Thankfully the resulting files were very different. Same genre but not copies.

I also test my image descriptions and titles to see if they create duplicates then modify my titles to be more generic if the results are too close.

I keep browsing their public explore gallery for interesting prompts, then modify them for my own purposes. I never go for copies, I always want the style and vibe for something very different, often a different genre altogether.

But there is a lot to learn about lighting, mood, composition directions. The more specific, the better the results. My descriptions are becoming longer and longer.

eta

now dropped to 5180

that is a low I have not seen in a very long time

Yeah, it's really interesting to browse on the Discord Channel. I love it. Really great to learn and get inspiration.
What kinda brutal is, how many user are now generating banners for youtube, linkedin, social media, etc.
And the most brutal is, how often Midjourney is generating really good stuff, which looks like it is photoshopped.

What I didn't know about Midjourney is, that you can "transfer" image effects of generated images to another.
Some users are creating complex effects, which normally are created with Photoshop's layer blending options.

I believe normal, boring stock photos / images will drop a lot in sales in the future. One have to create unique creative stuff.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on April 08, 2024, 07:20
I'm currently browsing on Midjourney's Discrod Channel to find some interesting prompts, which I would use as basis and modify on my own.
Found several persons using the describe function with some Adobe Stock thumbnails to generate prompts.
Lol, people are just copycats.

Is someone here using this function too?

... as he says that in the same breath and sentence while saying "I'm currently browsing on Midjourney's Discrod Channel to find some interesting prompts"... :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on April 08, 2024, 07:23
Tried it with my own files to check how my images are described and what those prompts then create. Thankfully the resulting files were very different. Same genre but not copies.

I also test my image descriptions and titles to see if they create duplicates then modify my titles to be more generic if the results are too close.

I keep browsing their public explore gallery for interesting prompts, then modify them for my own purposes. I never go for copies, I always want the style and vibe for something very different, often a different genre altogether.

But there is a lot to learn about lighting, mood, composition directions. The more specific, the better the results. My descriptions are becoming longer and longer.

eta

now dropped to 5180

that is a low I have not seen in a very long time

Yeah, it's really interesting to browse on the Discord Channel. I love it. Really great to learn and get inspiration.
What kinda brutal is, how many user are now generating banners for youtube, linkedin, social media, etc.
And the most brutal is, how often Midjourney is generating really good stuff, which looks like it is photoshopped.

What I didn't know about Midjourney is, that you can "transfer" image effects of generated images to another.
Some users are creating complex effects, which normally are created with Photoshop's layer blending options.

I believe normal, boring stock photos / images will drop a lot in sales in the future. One have to create unique creative stuff.

And that's why companies like Midjourney, ChatGPT, etc - should be accountable/comepensate the users they stole their materials from, on a perpetual, recurring basis - the same income they expect to get from having stolen it from other people... the "man in the middle" thing (i.e., they got the images from a "research" company, aka "stealing") is total b.s. designed to try and it make it appear they didn't steal stuff, when in fact, they did, and they do. Their business is based off of theft.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 08, 2024, 08:50
I'm currently browsing on Midjourney's Discrod Channel to find some interesting prompts, which I would use as basis and modify on my own.
Found several persons using the describe function with some Adobe Stock thumbnails to generate prompts.
Lol, people are just copycats.

Is someone here using this function too?

... as he says that in the same breath and sentence while saying "I'm currently browsing on Midjourney's Discrod Channel to find some interesting prompts"... :)

Nah, I'm using this more for inspiration since I'm anyway generating with Stable Diffusion so that I can't recreate a very similar content.
But it's exciting and depressing at the same time what users can create.
I'm happy I'm not working in the design industry, would be extremely upset seeing what nowday's people can create without any digital image processing skills.
If development continues at this rate hardly anyone will use Photoshop in 10 years.

Tried it with my own files to check how my images are described and what those prompts then create. Thankfully the resulting files were very different. Same genre but not copies.

I also test my image descriptions and titles to see if they create duplicates then modify my titles to be more generic if the results are too close.

I keep browsing their public explore gallery for interesting prompts, then modify them for my own purposes. I never go for copies, I always want the style and vibe for something very different, often a different genre altogether.

But there is a lot to learn about lighting, mood, composition directions. The more specific, the better the results. My descriptions are becoming longer and longer.

eta

now dropped to 5180

that is a low I have not seen in a very long time

Yeah, it's really interesting to browse on the Discord Channel. I love it. Really great to learn and get inspiration.
What kinda brutal is, how many user are now generating banners for youtube, linkedin, social media, etc.
And the most brutal is, how often Midjourney is generating really good stuff, which looks like it is photoshopped.

What I didn't know about Midjourney is, that you can "transfer" image effects of generated images to another.
Some users are creating complex effects, which normally are created with Photoshop's layer blending options.

I believe normal, boring stock photos / images will drop a lot in sales in the future. One have to create unique creative stuff.

And that's why companies like Midjourney, ChatGPT, etc - should be accountable/comepensate the users they stole their materials from, on a perpetual, recurring basis - the same income they expect to get from having stolen it from other people... the "man in the middle" thing (i.e., they got the images from a "research" company, aka "stealing") is total b.s. designed to try and it make it appear they didn't steal stuff, when in fact, they did, and they do. Their business is based off of theft.

Absolutely true. It's depressing how the photo / design industry is going to be ruined for many. Because we live in a fast paced modern world the quality don't matter much anymore. Many users will just generate with stolen material for their purposes like LinkedIn Profiles, YouTube Channels, Amazon shops, etc. They don't care that the models work with stolen material. They just wan't it fast and cheap.

Just wait, soon it will be the music industry's turn.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 08, 2024, 11:13

But it's exciting and depressing at the same time what users can create.
I'm happy I'm not working in the design industry, would be extremely upset seeing what nowday's people can create without any digital image processing skills.
If development continues at this rate hardly anyone will use Photoshop in 10 years.


I know someone who is a former, successful, graphic artist and she says, the business was ruined when they came out with Adobe Illustrator and people don't have to be artists anymore, they can do everything on a computer.  ;D I wanted to say, join in and learn Adobe Illustrator? She's still got the skills, talent, experience and brain.

If I see her this Summer I'll ask what she thinks of AI? Now people don't need to be much of any kind of artist, they just type in a prompt and have an illustration. Or don't like that? Alter the prompt, styles, lab settings, and make four more new "original" images.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 08, 2024, 11:21
My weekly rank this morning: 32,600th  ;D

Wow I must be good, I just jumped up to 27,100th, which is 5,500 places improved in rank.

Sorry for being sarcastic, but if buyers can't see this and no one else can, including weekly top sellers, which is limited to once a month, if I remember right, how does any of that matter? Buyers don't buy my images because of my rank or the ego boost page for top sellers. I wouldn't even know if I was ever featured on that. Probably not, but still? What's the purpose in wasting time, with "how's my rank?".

Watching the clock, doesn't change the time.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 08, 2024, 13:03
by sharing rank changes we get an even better feeling for - is it me - or is it everyone?

and in my case i think it is motivating that it is possible to move up very swiftly if you have in demand content.

there is always the rumor that agencies somehow "lock you" into a rank and that you can never earn more than some imaginary limit.

my very wild swings show this is not true at all.

i must do even better research, find some more niches and targeted content and then i am sure i can reach my financial goals even faster.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 08, 2024, 13:12
"Absolutely true. It's depressing how the photo / design industry is going to be ruined for many. Because we live in a fast paced modern world the quality don't matter much anymore. Many users will just generate with stolen material for their purposes like LinkedIn Profiles, YouTube Channels, Amazon shops, etc. They don't care that the models work with stolen material. They just wan't it fast and cheap.
"

please keep in mind that the number of people using stolen or just free content from unsplash, pixabay, free cc license has ALWAYS been at least 10000 more than regular stock buyers.

the majority of content used on the planet never involved a stock agency or a graphic designer.

we cater to the very, very small market of people who need a legally solid license and in countries where paying a designer or photographer is so expensive that buying from stock agencies is cheaper than hiring people.

we sell TIME in addition to images.

and that has not changed. it is still faster to quickly browse thousands of files from an agency instead of creating content with ai.


if adobe starts losing customers because nobody uses their software anymore and ai can create complete, perfectly formatted documents, books flyers, with text and images and great formating...then we have a problem.

but we are not there yet.



Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 08, 2024, 16:12

But it's exciting and depressing at the same time what users can create.
I'm happy I'm not working in the design industry, would be extremely upset seeing what nowday's people can create without any digital image processing skills.
If development continues at this rate hardly anyone will use Photoshop in 10 years.


I know someone who is a former, successful, graphic artist and she says, the business was ruined when they came out with Adobe Illustrator and people don't have to be artists anymore, they can do everything on a computer.  ;D I wanted to say, join in and learn Adobe Illustrator? She's still got the skills, talent, experience and brain.

If I see her this Summer I'll ask what she thinks of AI? Now people don't need to be much of any kind of artist, they just type in a prompt and have an illustration. Or don't like that? Alter the prompt, styles, lab settings, and make four more new "original" images.

Well, yeah if you go further back than the real artists, wo had real skills with pencil sketching, oil paintings, aquarell papers and colors, etc. had been really screwed up hard when Photoshop and Illustrator were published.
It was the digital nomad time when digital artists created stuff like logos and webdesigns in Illustrator.
You could get nice earnings with logo designing back then, e.g. about 200 to 300 bucks for one single corporate logo in ai / eps format.
Nowdays it is the time of digital theft. By looking at the discord channel I even believe that Midjourney generates masses of movie and series stills. If you use promptings like "cinematic still, cinematic vibe", etc. the images look really like from a movie or tv series.
I don't believe that the AI is in the current state so "clever" to apply image effects. There must be tons of material of movies that Midjourney uses for image generation.

@Back to topic:
My worst week since months sofar. No single sale.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 08, 2024, 16:41

But it's exciting and depressing at the same time what users can create.
I'm happy I'm not working in the design industry, would be extremely upset seeing what nowday's people can create without any digital image processing skills.
If development continues at this rate hardly anyone will use Photoshop in 10 years.


I know someone who is a former, successful, graphic artist and she says, the business was ruined when they came out with Adobe Illustrator and people don't have to be artists anymore, they can do everything on a computer.  ;D I wanted to say, join in and learn Adobe Illustrator? She's still got the skills, talent, experience and brain.

If I see her this Summer I'll ask what she thinks of AI? Now people don't need to be much of any kind of artist, they just type in a prompt and have an illustration. Or don't like that? Alter the prompt, styles, lab settings, and make four more new "original" images.

Well, yeah if you go further back than the real artists, wo had real skills with pencil sketching, oil paintings, aquarell papers and colors, etc. had been really screwed up hard when Photoshop and Illustrator were published.
It was the digital nomad time when digital artists created stuff like logos and webdesigns in Illustrator.
You could get nice earnings with logo designing back then, e.g. about 200 to 300 bucks for one single corporate logo in ai / eps format.
Nowdays it is the time of digital theft. By looking at the discord channel I even believe that Midjourney generates masses of movie and series stills. If you use promptings like "cinematic still, cinematic vibe", etc. the images look really like from a movie or tv series.
I don't believe that the AI is in the current state so "clever" to apply image effects. There must be tons of material of movies that Midjourney uses for image generation.

@Back to topic:
My worst week since months sofar. No single sale.

May I ask where you come from or where you live?

Nobody here in Germany can live on 200 to 300 dollars for a corporate logo, let alone feed a family. The cost of living is simply too high for that.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 09, 2024, 00:38

But it's exciting and depressing at the same time what users can create.
I'm happy I'm not working in the design industry, would be extremely upset seeing what nowday's people can create without any digital image processing skills.
If development continues at this rate hardly anyone will use Photoshop in 10 years.


I know someone who is a former, successful, graphic artist and she says, the business was ruined when they came out with Adobe Illustrator and people don't have to be artists anymore, they can do everything on a computer.  ;D I wanted to say, join in and learn Adobe Illustrator? She's still got the skills, talent, experience and brain.

If I see her this Summer I'll ask what she thinks of AI? Now people don't need to be much of any kind of artist, they just type in a prompt and have an illustration. Or don't like that? Alter the prompt, styles, lab settings, and make four more new "original" images.

Well, yeah if you go further back than the real artists, wo had real skills with pencil sketching, oil paintings, aquarell papers and colors, etc. had been really screwed up hard when Photoshop and Illustrator were published.
It was the digital nomad time when digital artists created stuff like logos and webdesigns in Illustrator.
You could get nice earnings with logo designing back then, e.g. about 200 to 300 bucks for one single corporate logo in ai / eps format.
Nowdays it is the time of digital theft. By looking at the discord channel I even believe that Midjourney generates masses of movie and series stills. If you use promptings like "cinematic still, cinematic vibe", etc. the images look really like from a movie or tv series.
I don't believe that the AI is in the current state so "clever" to apply image effects. There must be tons of material of movies that Midjourney uses for image generation.

@Back to topic:
My worst week since months sofar. No single sale.

May I ask where you come from or where you live?

Nobody here in Germany can live on 200 to 300 dollars for a corporate logo, let alone feed a family. The cost of living is simply too high for that.
I'm living in Germany. Years ago you could live even as a design freelancer quite well in Germany. You would not sell just a single logo a month, Rather at least 10 and design websites in parallel.
If you're skilled this was easily possible.
I sold back then some but not as a pro. But there were some really experienced pros 10 years ago, who could live of it.

For example 99designs was a famous design plattform for freelancers.

Today I can't imagine there are many buyers. Instead the majority will use Midjourney.
There are tons of users generating logos, icons and web layouts.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Sebastian Radu on April 09, 2024, 08:27
Not only rank but also sales have dropped sharply in recent weeks. Maybe just in my case... I don't know...

 :(
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 09, 2024, 11:56
by sharing rank changes we get an even better feeling for - is it me - or is it everyone?

and in my case i think it is motivating that it is possible to move up very swiftly if you have in demand content.

there is always the rumor that agencies somehow "lock you" into a rank and that you can never earn more than some imaginary limit.

my very wild swings show this is not true at all.

i must do even better research, find some more niches and targeted content and then i am sure i can reach my financial goals even faster.

Yes, it's entertaining, and the last part BOLD is what's more important.

The imaginary limits and locks are just people who are unhappy or losing sales and make up reasons to justify or rationalize. No proof needed to post on a forum how the agency is favoring someone else. It's always, someone else gets better placement, some favorite person has unfair higher rank and makes more, because of something the agency does. It's not because those people have better images, newer images, more images, the trending images, or like you do, the successful people search for needs of customers.

"by sharing rank changes we get an even better feeling for - is it me - or is it everyone?"
The number of people who participate is so small, the sample is not enough for any valid conclusions. If it's "me or everyone" then your rank will be the same if you sell 100 images and everyone sells 100 images, as if you sell 50 images and everyone sells 50 images. Your rank, can stay the same number, if you and everyone else, sell more or sell less, because it's just a rank, by position.

One week, you're on top, because you have a great week, the next, you feel like you're down, because either you went flat, or someone else had a good high sales week. The rank can be like the tide.

I admit my rank is a joke and irrelevant. If I go up or down 5,500 places that's nowhere near if you go up or down 100 places. I'm at 28,000 right now. Everyone in the world, with the same number of sales, is at 28,000. If you have 100 sales so far this week, everyone with 100 sales, is identical to you, and everyone with 99 sales, which could be any number of people, will be the next rank down. If you are 4,000 and 100 people have 100 sales, the person with 99 and everyone else with 99 will be 3,900 rank.

I think you can see how a small number of sales, even one, can make a big change in the individual rank we can see. But really, it's a cluster. Every single image you sell, makes a move in your rank. Potentially a large move for two or three sales. So what does that really mean? It's almost like, how did the wind blow and hour ago?

I still say, watching a clock doesn't change the time. Watching your rank, while in general is interesting, it won't change your rank?  :) There's much more value in what you say:  find some more niches and targeted content and I'll add, watch trends, the news and the time of year.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 09, 2024, 12:01
Not only rank but also sales have dropped sharply in recent weeks. Maybe just in my case... I don't know...

 :(

Having a really, really slow week. I think it is spring break in many places and orthodox easter time and the end of ramadan...so holiday breaks in many places.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 09, 2024, 14:02
by sharing rank changes we get an even better feeling for - is it me - or is it everyone?

and in my case i think it is motivating that it is possible to move up very swiftly if you have in demand content.

there is always the rumor that agencies somehow "lock you" into a rank and that you can never earn more than some imaginary limit.

my very wild swings show this is not true at all.

i must do even better research, find some more niches and targeted content and then i am sure i can reach my financial goals even faster.

Yes, it's entertaining, and the last part BOLD is what's more important.

The imaginary limits and locks are just people who are unhappy or losing sales and make up reasons to justify or rationalize. No proof needed to post on a forum how the agency is favoring someone else. It's always, someone else gets better placement, some favorite person has unfair higher rank and makes more, because of something the agency does. It's not because those people have better images, newer images, more images, the trending images, or like you do, the successful people search for needs of customers.

"by sharing rank changes we get an even better feeling for - is it me - or is it everyone?"
The number of people who participate is so small, the sample is not enough for any valid conclusions. If it's "me or everyone" then your rank will be the same if you sell 100 images and everyone sells 100 images, as if you sell 50 images and everyone sells 50 images. Your rank, can stay the same number, if you and everyone else, sell more or sell less, because it's just a rank, by position.

One week, you're on top, because you have a great week, the next, you feel like you're down, because either you went flat, or someone else had a good high sales week. The rank can be like the tide.

I admit my rank is a joke and irrelevant. If I go up or down 5,500 places that's nowhere near if you go up or down 100 places. I'm at 28,000 right now. Everyone in the world, with the same number of sales, is at 28,000. If you have 100 sales so far this week, everyone with 100 sales, is identical to you, and everyone with 99 sales, which could be any number of people, will be the next rank down. If you are 4,000 and 100 people have 100 sales, the person with 99 and everyone else with 99 will be 3,900 rank.

I think you can see how a small number of sales, even one, can make a big change in the individual rank we can see. But really, it's a cluster. Every single image you sell, makes a move in your rank. Potentially a large move for two or three sales. So what does that really mean? It's almost like, how did the wind blow and hour ago?

I still say, watching a clock doesn't change the time. Watching your rank, while in general is interesting, it won't change your rank?  :) There's much more value in what you say:  find some more niches and targeted content and I'll add, watch trends, the news and the time of year.

Yes, I understand what you mean.
Some people try to use the ranking more as an indication of the overall current situation, to say which way the wind is blowing.
So when I see a low ranking, all I see is that the wind is not blowing in my direction.
But I still don't know which way the wind is blowing, i.e. which content is currently in demand.

It would actually be better if Adobe displayed the number of sales per image category.
Or at least not in absolute figures, but relative to the previous week/month, etc.

So we are still rowing in the fog ...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 09, 2024, 14:16
We also learned that there are several single artists in the top 100. That is very valuable information.

I genuinely thought this was impossible, that you needed a huge production team and maybe at least 100k files to get there.

But some people are doing it with less than 10k files.

I don't need them to tell me what sells. I just need to know it is possible.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on April 09, 2024, 16:20
Hey Cobalt :)

Yes, the information that you can make it into the top 100 on your own is really good information.

Even if I will never make it there :-)
For me it bounces around between 2,700 and 3,500 and the display in the ranking seems to be delayed between 3 and 5 days.

So if we are comparing numbers it would be best to all post our data on Sunday evening for example, so we have a fixed point of comparison with which we could then calculate positions, fluctuations, variances and all that stuff.
That would probably bring us a little bit closer to the truth of the positioning :)

Have a sunny day@all,
Michael
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: DanielVisuals on April 09, 2024, 19:16
Not only rank but also sales have dropped sharply in recent weeks. Maybe just in my case... I don't know...

 :(

Having a really, really slow week. I think it is spring break in many places and orthodox easter time and the end of ramadan...so holiday breaks in many places.

The last two weeks have been very slow for me too. I’m also attributing that to current holiday breaks across the world. It seems that many contributors are experiencing the same slow down in sales. What should we do? Keep creating !
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on April 09, 2024, 19:20
Had a good sales day today after a very slow day yesterday.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 10, 2024, 02:54
yep!A really poor Monday,better Tuesday,last week pretty good,not great but good.

I'm also getting more rejections than usual lately,on all types of content,maybe just bad luck.

I have also seen that some contributors use famous brands in the description of AI content,for example,you can't generate with AI a pair of shoes and write "Nike" in the description,I don't want to point the finger at anyone,I don't think anyone who acts in this way will have a long life on Adobe Stock,sooner or later Adobe will find out and block them.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Andrej.S. on April 10, 2024, 09:21
We also learned that there are several single artists in the top 100. That is very valuable information.

I genuinely thought this was impossible, that you needed a huge production team and maybe at least 100k files to get there.

But some people are doing it with less than 10k files.

I don't need them to tell me what sells. I just need to know it is possible.

Yes the information is interesting but not very informative. We still don't know if it's a mix of niches, content quality or just beeing pushed by Adobe because of other aspects.

I haven't seen very successfull ports with less than 10k images in the featured best selling contributors, who are selling just usefull content. Most featured ports look very similar and most of the current AI ports are just a series of stolen prompt lists.

Jacob Lund and Gorodenkoff are featured almost every week with over 1 million downloads and approx. 40k ports.
But they offer as production teams more high end quality than just useful things.

So we still don't know what is selling really good, so that we can invest more time on creating this content.

I still believe that very efficient and profitable ports consist most of high quality banner graphics. Graphics are almost always outselling people images.
I will test it by buying the basic Midjourney Plan and then creating with Photoshop complex banners with the generated basis images.

I'm tired of wasting time with regular images. The competition is too high. If you have not an unique port so that Adobe will push you it's really waste of time.

PS: My week is extremly low with 3 downloads.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 10, 2024, 09:36
Let us know how you do.

I have also started to do graphic design banners with midjourney. No sales yet :)

But overall my strategy is very simple, do test searches on subjects that I understand, upload what is missing. I also experiment a lot and keep testing new things.

So far it is working. My biggest problem is that I find it very difficult to raise my production. I wish I could reliable create 100 files a week. But sadly I can't.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 10, 2024, 11:39
We also learned that there are several single artists in the top 100. That is very valuable information.

I genuinely thought this was impossible, that you needed a huge production team and maybe at least 100k files to get there.

But some people are doing it with less than 10k files.

I don't need them to tell me what sells. I just need to know it is possible.

How do you know that there are several single artists in the top 100? How do we see the ranks of other artists? (I think I forgot, if I knew that) Yes, true, it would take a large number of files and good ones.

Here's an idea or suggestion, if you want to track rank. Everyone who wants to post their rank, needs to look at the same time on the same day. Otherwise it's just numbers without meaning or context. If I look on Monday the rank is going to be different from Sunday. If I watched every day, all week, my rank will go up and down, based on whether I get DLs or someone else gets a streak. It can change by location and time of day.

Get a group and maybe anonymous would be good, to look at 2PM UTC on Sunday afternoon. Then post their rank and number of downloads for the database. Soon you will have a good idea of how many DLs make a general rank position. If the reasoning isn't clear, Sunday is the end of the week. The time is generally convenient for people in Europe and the America's. 2PM Greenwich is 8AM Central time USA.

Now that would be fun reading!

Example:

Predicted Lifetime Downloads / Position (using Old data 2019)

8,000/4,700
5,000/8,500
1,400/28,000
1,200/32,000
450    /67,000
200    /120,000

If someone had 8,000 downloads by the date these numbers were viewed, they would have ranked 4,700 on the lifetime downloads list at Adobe. Also there is a cut off for lifetime, maybe 200 or less DLs, as an example, where someone will not see a number, but instead ---
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 10, 2024, 11:53
I am in several private groups where people share weekly ranks. So we have a good baseline. But I only know one person in the top 100 and he is no longer a single artists, but has a team.

But here we had several people sharing very high ranks. Of course you have to believe them, but they are all old timers.

Like I said, I don't need totally exact data. Just to know that it is possible.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 10, 2024, 12:40
I am in several private groups where people share weekly ranks. So we have a good baseline. But I only know one person in the top 100 and he is no longer a single artists, but has a team.

But here we had several people sharing very high ranks. Of course you have to believe them, but they are all old timers.

Like I said, I don't need totally exact data. Just to know that it is possible.

entering the top 100 as a single artist is possible,take a lot of time,around 10 years minimum,and also luck in various aspects in addition to hard and constant work and skill,but it is also possible as a single artist,although we can safely say that for most contributors it is impossible.

I have updates from contributors with huge portfolios who have been in the microstock for more than 10 years,from what I see in the March results the trend is this:

all agencies are down,from 30% to 50% less,all except Adobe which ranges from stable for some up to 50% more

for me March 2024 was only 10% more than March 2023 on Adobe,while instead January 40% more and February 50% more.

for this month I expect 40-50% more from how it is going so far :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 11, 2024, 13:56
I am in several private groups where people share weekly ranks. So we have a good baseline. But I only know one person in the top 100 and he is no longer a single artists, but has a team.

But here we had several people sharing very high ranks. Of course you have to believe them, but they are all old timers.

Like I said, I don't need totally exact data. Just to know that it is possible.

Nice! Just remember to take your notes on the same day, around the same time, or the numbers become less reliable.

I have no doubts about your numbers or what others share. There's no reason for a private group to have people making things up.

I remain irrelevant and so do my numbers. 👍 23,200 right at this moment. Which is a sad not, not for myself, but the many others, who are doing worse than I do.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 11, 2024, 15:24
"I remain irrelevant and so do my numbers. 👍 23,200 right at this moment. Which is a sad not, not for myself, but the many others, who are doing worse than I do."

You've been doing stock for quite a while now. If it was important to you, you could create more focused content and have better sales :)

Moving up in rank is not exactly magic, just a lot of very, very hard work.

Having a few friends to work and share results with is very motivating. But you can also do it on your own.

Adobe gives a lot of very helpful suggestions in their discord what customers are looking for and what to record in the current month to have it ready for next year.

They also have monthly challenges based on currently needed content.  There is a lot of support in researching trends from all agencies.

And if there is a subject in their newsletters that everyone s asking for, then it must be in high demand...

eta

pos 5580...but I will claw myself back up in a few weeks.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: BT1976 on April 11, 2024, 16:02
Let's say we sold 5 images in the first minute of the weekly ranking. For example, the position was 1750. But we didn't make any other sales that week. The position will continue to appear as 1750 until the last minute of the weekly rankings.

That's why I think the results can be very misleading, except for the first positions.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 11, 2024, 17:43
no it doesn‘t.

the weekly rank is adjusted once a day. if you have no other sales that week, your rank will be crashing down.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 12, 2024, 11:15
"I remain irrelevant and so do my numbers. 👍 23,200 right at this moment. Which is a sad not, not for myself, but the many others, who are doing worse than I do."

You've been doing stock for quite a while now. If it was important to you, you could create more focused content and have better sales :)


Agreed, anyone can move up with planning, attention to what sells, and a bit of work. Like you say, knowing it's possible is a good thing.

In my case, Adobe doesn't take editorial. Last I checked I was over 80% Editorial images.

I'll also add, I'm not complaining about my rank or what they do give me. I'm just reporting the numbers. I continue to feel sorrow for people who are doing worse than I do, with my limited, only 1,019 files. I finally put my foot down and passed 1,000 this year.  ;) As someone irrelevant I was just adding the number, which is the same today, 23,200th to show the brackets and levels of bottom feeders.

I joined Adobe December 2015. Lifetime is 25,300th. I don't expect that to change much, either way. Maybe down as people are active and work harder. Maybe the same relative rank, as people, stop actively working? Anything I suspect is only a guess. But if 25,300 people are ahead of me, how many are behind? In theory, everyone else. How many contributors are there for Adobe?

If I'm 23,200th, and this week has been pretty low, once again, everyone else is worse off than I am. 100,000 contributors? I'm ahead of 76,800. No brag in that, but wow, I'm terrible, what are they?  ;D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 12, 2024, 12:32
Do you do editorial video as well? I get some really interesting sales on pond5 and have to keep reminding myself to do more editorial.

Some people post editorial sales nearly every day.

https://www.pond5.com/community?thread=8135844 (https://www.pond5.com/community?thread=8135844)

You probably know that Adobe takes illustrative editorial. I have started a tiny collection of German food stuff and get regular sales. Must do more of that, once I get back to real photos again.

I don't think you need to be sad for anyone with smaller ports or lower ranks. For many stock is just a fun hobby, if they make enough to buy a new lens once a year, they consider it a great success.

In one of my groups somebody said that less than 2000 people make more than 1000 dollars a month on Adobe.

I couldn't quite believe it, but by sharing our ranks, I now think there are less people making more than 1k than I thought.

But in all the cases I have seen, it is because producers are simply not listening to what the agencies are asking for. They spend hardly any time on research, if you ask them which customer group they are specifically targeting you get a blank stare...

Too many people think stock is some kind of slot machine, just throw many files in and then the money comes out.

I think editorial is one of the best things you can do in the time of ai.

Just do more of it. And while you are at, think about a few normal stock images you can shoot at the same time.

Or just little videos of "hands doing something", doing dishes, cooking, planting flowers, writing, typing...so many little every day things that are very easy to document.

You can do better than just a 1k port :)

You already know everything that is needed to have great sales.

:)

pos 5480


Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 12, 2024, 19:06
"I remain irrelevant and so do my numbers. 👍 23,200 right at this moment. Which is a sad not, not for myself, but the many others, who are doing worse than I do."

You've been doing stock for quite a while now. If it was important to you, you could create more focused content and have better sales :)


Agreed, anyone can move up with planning, attention to what sells, and a bit of work. Like you say, knowing it's possible is a good thing.

In my case, Adobe doesn't take editorial. Last I checked I was over 80% Editorial images.

I'll also add, I'm not complaining about my rank or what they do give me. I'm just reporting the numbers. I continue to feel sorrow for people who are doing worse than I do, with my limited, only 1,019 files. I finally put my foot down and passed 1,000 this year.  ;) As someone irrelevant I was just adding the number, which is the same today, 23,200th to show the brackets and levels of bottom feeders.

I joined Adobe December 2015. Lifetime is 25,300th. I don't expect that to change much, either way. Maybe down as people are active and work harder. Maybe the same relative rank, as people, stop actively working? Anything I suspect is only a guess. But if 25,300 people are ahead of me, how many are behind? In theory, everyone else. How many contributors are there for Adobe?

If I'm 23,200th, and this week has been pretty low, once again, everyone else is worse off than I am. 100,000 contributors? I'm ahead of 76,800. No brag in that, but wow, I'm terrible, what are they?  ;D

Pete,you may think you're terrible and you're probably less terrible than you think,but aside from your portfolio you have time on your side  :)

you started in December 2015 so before many other contributors,even before me,and due to the way Adobe's sales system works you have an advantage.

the system show your content longer than others who started in 2020 for example.

the number of sales you make depends mainly on how long you have been a contributor,your level and what you have in your portfolio.

the point is that you could use this advantage.

if we upload the same file at the same time to Adobe Stock you are more likely than me to sell it,because you have the advantage of time,because you started before me.

so in short,my advice is upload more,take advantage of this advantage  :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 13, 2024, 10:12
Just to answer, without continuing variations. I shoot News Editorial, which Adobe doesn't take.

Yes I have some IEd, they do fine, when they are useful for buyers or the current events.

When I feel sad, it's not all broken up pity, and that. I just mean, if someone is trying, and working at this and they are doing worse than me, they might look for something else. I like the money, I use it, I appreciate what I get. Yes, I work for the money or why bother uploading? But it's not important for my life, I don't depend on the Microstock income, which is different than the serious people.

I'm not that serious, what I upload is not that well researched, or targeted, I'm just having fun. Of course, the money makes it more fun.  :)

This has been a terrible week, even by my usual numbers:  25,300th I've had more sales in a day, than I had all this week. I watched for a while last year and was up to 7,740 in November. Considering I was in the 7-8,000 a bunch of weeks, and currently I'm 25,000, I don't see much useful information from watching my rank. I can see the sales, downloads and money, without wondering "how am I doing" compared to someone else.

How many active artists are there? And I know active is a vague term. AS says 20 uploads and 100 DLS a year. That's a pretty low requirement, but with that in mind, how many artists are there?

One more small thing about numbers and ranks. When people here were more active and volunteered data for the MSG poll, and when IS had artists data that we could see, I figured people from this group were the top 5% of Microstock artists, in the world. That's pretty good!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 13, 2024, 14:12
this was my best rank ever,when my portfolio is highlighted I sell quite well,my goal is to have at least more than 1000 usd per month from Adobe Stock.

I think it will still take 2-3 years at least to reach this goal,regardless of what I upload,because it is mainly a question of time.

if I stop uploading today and come back in 5 years and start uploading again,in my opinion,I will soon start traveling between 2000 and 3000 ranks every week,because in the meantime 5 years have passed anyway even if I haven't uploaded anything else.

However,this is not convenient to do,because if instead I take advantage of the next 5 years and continue to upload,I will most likely be among the first 1000 at least.

TIME This is one of the most important factor on Adobe Stock,it takes a lot of patience,my portfolio is still young,6 years is not enough!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: pancaketom on April 13, 2024, 14:33
I would say time is the biggest factor against making a lot of money at microstock. I have no idea of the actual half life of images, but in general with the same port you will make less money every year from a combination of more competition (both from other artists and thieves and now AI) plus the sites taking a bigger cut either by changing the terms, selling their own material, or through backdoor accounting shenanigans or just lower costs - although inflation seems to make everything more expensive, it doesn't seem to be the case for microstock which keeps getting cheaper either in terms of actual cost or better license deals or more subs for the same amount or all you can eat buffets.

So, if you want to make $ at this you are more likely to do that by working now rather than waiting a while when looking back these will be the good old days. It is sort of like planting a tree, the best time to do it is 10 years ago (or for microstock 15 years ago), but the next best time is now.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 13, 2024, 16:19
I would say time is the biggest factor against making a lot of money at microstock. I have no idea of the actual half life of images, but in general with the same port you will make less money every year from a combination of more competition (both from other artists and thieves and now AI) plus the sites taking a bigger cut either by changing the terms, selling their own material, or through backdoor accounting shenanigans or just lower costs - although inflation seems to make everything more expensive, it doesn't seem to be the case for microstock which keeps getting cheaper either in terms of actual cost or better license deals or more subs for the same amount or all you can eat buffets.

So, if you want to make $ at this you are more likely to do that by working now rather than waiting a while when looking back these will be the good old days. It is sort of like planting a tree, the best time to do it is 10 years ago (or for microstock 15 years ago), but the next best time is now.


I am aware of that.

But: in general, there is hardly a development anywhere else where someone says they want to work more and more and more to get the same money as they did 10 years ago.

Everyone has to decide for themselves whether they are prepared to figuratively compensate for a lower hourly wage by working twice as much.

Personally, I don't want to do that because I would rather invest the time in work that pays better. I don't want to sound arrogant, but I simply don't want to feed a beast that is getting greedier and greedier at my expense.

When the time comes in this industry when you have to work 100 hours a week and continue to be active in the hamster wheel in order to earn what you got 10 years earlier with 10 hours of work, that is simply the wrong way for me personally.

However, I'm happy to admit that this is easy to say, because microstock has always been just a hobby for me and I've never been forced to make a living from it. And I would like to add: It really was a nice hobby that somehow made the work worthwhile. I wouldn't want to miss that time. I had a lot of fun!

And it is precisely this fun and the resulting motivation that I personally have unfortunately lost. I think that's a great pity, but I accept it.



I also have the problem that I'm running out of ideas. My creativity is waning - possibly also due to my age. And when images are copied almost unchanged and the agencies don't give a crap, that's another motivation killer!

Nevertheless, money still comes in - albeit much less than before - without me having to do anything for it. That's the beauty of it!

And: I hope every contributor who is hard-working and can therefore show a positive development, unlike me right now, is rewarded for their hard work! And I hope that every one of them will be able to say in a few years' time that their work has been worthwhile.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 14, 2024, 03:02
I would say time is the biggest factor against making a lot of money at microstock. I have no idea of the actual half life of images, but in general with the same port you will make less money every year from a combination of more competition (both from other artists and thieves and now AI) plus the sites taking a bigger cut either by changing the terms, selling their own material, or through backdoor accounting shenanigans or just lower costs - although inflation seems to make everything more expensive, it doesn't seem to be the case for microstock which keeps getting cheaper either in terms of actual cost or better license deals or more subs for the same amount or all you can eat buffets.

So, if you want to make $ at this you are more likely to do that by working now rather than waiting a while when looking back these will be the good old days. It is sort of like planting a tree, the best time to do it is 10 years ago (or for microstock 15 years ago), but the next best time is now.

in my opinion this is true for all agencies except Adobe Stock.

I advise everyone to forget about agencies like Istock or SS.

first of all why would I ever sell content for 10c? or video at 0.25c? Why?
just because I can sometimes sell an image on SS for $50 doesn't mean I have to give away my content like that.

on Istock our entire portfolios are given away for nothing...low resolution,refund... but what . is that supposed to mean?but our contents are downloaded anyway and little or nothing ends up in our pockets,not even vectors are paid all 20% as promised,many are at 15%

enough is enough,we simply need to stop giving our content to these agencies if we want to hope that things will start to change.

the only agency accessible to all that has always shown us that it can improve the current condition of microstock is Adobe Stock.

we must try to support this agency,all the others were fine before in the past,today not anymore,now they are just using us.

I wouldn't worry about AI especially if you're a photographer,if you're an illustrator it's a little different,but equally you don't need to worry about AI.

I was talking to photographer friends who have been running photographic contests since 20 years and are earning more since AI has become accessible,the demand for real content is increasing from what I know.

the problem here is us,who see 300usd on Istock and we say"I have wow good month on Istock!" then let's go and see and we have sold 700 licenses very probably for this amount,but we still think it was a good month because we only see the $300

prices continue to fall because we continue to settle for the crumbs they throw at us.

I still have my active port on SS but by the end of the year I will probably deactivate it,so then if someone wants to download my content they have to do it on Adobe Stock because they won't find it anywhere else.

I firmly believe that if we all do this,things will start to change,but obviously I am also aware that it is a rather unlikely scenario,especially in the immediate future,because those who still earn enough on SS or Istock will continue to want to do it and will continue to look at the $300 instead of the 700 licenses sold to make those $300

the discussion of time on Adobe is important,then however I omitted a detail which is a professional secret,obviously I cannot tell the whole world everything in detail about my work or how I intend to manage my work in the future,
but yes,we definitely agree the best time is now,It's always better to keep working than to stop and start again in the future.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 14, 2024, 13:05
I still have my active port on SS but by the end of the year I will probably deactivate it,so then if someone wants to download my content they have to do it on Adobe Stock because they won't find it anywhere else.

I firmly believe that if we all do this,things will start to change...


When a mouse runs across my kitchen, at night, and eats a grain of rice, my cabinets and cupboards don't change. If I throw a rock into the ocean, the water level doesn't change.

If you or I, and most of the rest of us, remove all of our images from everywhere except Adobe, I don't see one buyer anywhere in the world, who will notice, or care. We have seen that hundreds or possibly thousands have removed their images from SS and IS, and nothing has changed.

Sorry to disagree, but, nothing will change, and things will not recover and SS won't suddenly relent their stupid resets and lower commissions, because of anything we do.

I would say time is the biggest factor against making a lot of money at microstock. I have no idea of the actual half life of images, but in general with the same port you will make less money every year from a combination of more competition (both from other artists and thieves and now AI) plus the sites taking a bigger cut either by changing the terms, selling their own material, or through backdoor accounting shenanigans or just lower costs - although inflation seems to make everything more expensive, it doesn't seem to be the case for microstock which keeps getting cheaper either in terms of actual cost or better license deals or more subs for the same amount or all you can eat buffets.

So, if you want to make $ at this you are more likely to do that by working now rather than waiting a while when looking back these will be the good old days. It is sort of like planting a tree, the best time to do it is 10 years ago (or for microstock 15 years ago), but the next best time is now.


Do images actually have a half-life or has the decline always been caused by competition?  ??? If someone knows, that would be interesting data, vs theories and stock mythology based on what people hypothesize. Not a disagreement, just looking at the same truth, images don't keep earning as well, once they get older.

That covers it, the bold you wrote.

Yes, who knew that 2012 would be the "good old days" that we would never see again?

If things keep going downhill at the same rate as they are now, Microstock will be a historical note in 2032, instead of a way to make some side income. Someone remind me that I said that, if I'm still alive. We'll have an old-timers forum for, remember when we made money from Microstock. It will be named MSG = Microstock Geezers.  ;D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on April 15, 2024, 00:21
1. re: cobalt stating "2,000 ppl making $1k or less from adobe" - how did the ppl in the forum arrive @ that number? seems like pulling #'s out of their butt unless they have some direct inside knowledge. of course - I am not sure what the # would be - just curious how they arrived @ those conclusions?

2. re: rankings - looking, I think my "best" rank was around 200th or so - but just looking @ my numbers, in some ways that is rather irrelevant, because
a) "income" is not really related to rank... looking @ some of my stats, my (weekly) income was actually higher one week @ rank 1000 than when I was @ rank ~200...
b) "income" also depends on a whole bunch of factors... do you luck out and get people purchasing full one-time non sub licenses (i.e., so you get a $30 sale), or is it a whole bunch of $0.33 subs... (i.e., you could get "500" downloads, but @ $0.33/a pop = $165 usd. conversely, if they were all $30 net sales to you, that is 500 @ $30 each = $1500 usd).
c) in some cases it is very seasonal, i.e., say Easter, when "everyone" is downloading Easter bunnies & Jesus pictures, versus say mother's day where it is all about flowers, etc... so you get "lucky" because YOUR picture of Jesus with an Easter bunny is more popular than the other 5,000,000 people with pictures of Jesus & an Easter bunny...
d) There is some degree of "luck" involved. While there are certain principles that are important (good subject, good lighting, trending, good keywords, etc) - sometimes you just have a picture that due to the mysterious nature of adobe's algorithms takes off, while others don't... if I knew the "magic formula" - obviously lol I'd only produce consistent "best sellers"...

There are certain topics which I know are being pushed by the blackrock/vanguard/WEF/UN/etc (the 'pyschotic' board of people) agenda, which "could" make extra $$$, but just choose not to participate in (i.e., the gay/trans/miscegnation crap designed to try & break up families/etc to make ppl easier to control)... others though - don't care - and they just want $$$ and keep pumping out some weird gay/trans/miscegnation crap... simply because some of the weirder, more perverted crap is really being pushed hard... some profiles seem to be pure perverted trans/gay crap... but - I guess they have to live with that - "that" is their "legacy"...

Anyhoo...

Only thing I would take from "rankings" is:
a) if you are ranked "higher" - meaning your downloads are higher relative to everyone else - means specifically with the "adobe" crowd of customers - you are providing the content they want. (Just because it sells @ adobe doesn't mean it would necessarily sell as well elsewhere - the adobe crowd tends to have specific tastes/styles/etc).
b) if you are consistently ranked "high" - it probably means you are consistently doing something correctly that is in demand.
c) bragging rights to make yourself "feel" better if you see you are "doing better" than someone else...



Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 15, 2024, 04:38
@Pete if you throw a stone into the ocean you add volume to the water so the level rises,in an imperceptible way but it rises,if you do it in a bucket of water you can notice the difference.

even your cabinets and cupboards change,everything changes with time everything is constantly changing,the universe is also continually expanding.

but apart from these physics-related discussions,in my opinion however,if millions of images are removed it changes,and everyone notices it.

but anyway Pete,it's a purely theoretical discussion,because it isn't applied in reality anyway.

as far as I'm concerned I prefer to sell only on Adobe,I think it's the best thing to do.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 15, 2024, 04:53
@super

like I said, the number of less than 2000 producers making over 1k a month on Adobe was a „trust me bro“ thing, not a published reference or adobe quote.

I didn‘t believe it at the time, because there are so many people doing well on Adobe just in Germany alone with large ports from the Fotolia days.

Then people started sharing weekly positions in several places and I was suprised that not more people with larger ports had a high volume of sales.

Obviously the ranking thing is biased as well. Especially in groups where people have your adobe alias and can look up your port, if you are really doing well, do people share their ranks?

I am only doing it because I am „restarting“ my stock journey and many people keep asking me if it is worth it.

So I am sharing information freely, in the hope of learning something interesting myself.

And I think we have learned a lot by sharing data.

Obviously, don‘t find the idea useful, just don‘t do it :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 15, 2024, 09:07
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 15, 2024, 11:01
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...

I recently saw videos for 10 USD and images for 1.65 USD,my RPD on Adobe goes up,if you don't upload Wilm this is the result.

if I were you I would take advantage of your advantageous position,go back to uploading at least 30 contents a month,any type of content and you will see how everything goes back uphill,if you no longer upload anything the system starts to put you aside.

I am in a more disadvantaged position than you,I produce much more than you but I collect less than you,because you started before me,but I know that in a couple of years I will start to harvest the fruits of my work,just as I am now reaping the fruits of what I produced a year ago and more.

this in my opinion is one of the things that has changed a lot in recent years,as time passes we need more and more time to see the results of our work.


Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 15, 2024, 11:15
@Pete if you throw a stone into the ocean you add volume to the water so the level rises,in an imperceptible way but it rises,if you do it in a bucket of water you can notice the difference.

even your cabinets and cupboards change,everything changes with time everything is constantly changing,the universe is also continually expanding.

but apart from these physics-related discussions,in my opinion however,if millions of images are removed it changes,and everyone notices it.

but anyway Pete,it's a purely theoretical discussion,because it isn't applied in reality anyway.

as far as I'm concerned I prefer to sell only on Adobe,I think it's the best thing to do.

See above, that's your choice.  8) 👍 We are independent and we make our own choices.

My point was, and you agree with the math and physics, no one will notice, because hundreds of millions of images will not be removed. You may get 100 or 1,000 contributor accounts to agree, but not enough to make SS or IS to take notice or care. So any hypothetical about change or the future, is also what you say, not reality in any way.

SS "462,572,973 stock photos, vectors, and illustrations are available royalty-free for download." If 5,000 people remove 5,000 images, that's a pebble in the ocean. 25 million images gone, and 437,000,000 images still there.

Meanwhile, trying to go back on topic to AS Rank...  ;)


Anyhoo...

Only thing I would take from "rankings" is:
a) if you are ranked "higher" - meaning your downloads are higher relative to everyone else - means specifically with the "adobe" crowd of customers - you are providing the content they want. (Just because it sells @ adobe doesn't mean it would necessarily sell as well elsewhere - the adobe crowd tends to have specific tastes/styles/etc).
b) if you are consistently ranked "high" - it probably means you are consistently doing something correctly that is in demand.
c) bragging rights to make yourself "feel" better if you see you are "doing better" than someone else...


Y E S

Is the rank supposed to show how many people are making $1,000 a month or more. I didn't quote the part that said less. But still, that's my question? More people used to make that $1,000 a month on some stock sites.

Rank is relative, and seems to be pretty stable. Yes, it's downloads not income. But for someone to watch their weekly rank, go up and down, they are just seeing the normal fluctuations based on demand and seasonal. The better people, lets just say Cobalt for example, will always be higher and stay in a general range of high and low, because they produce good work and have a large collection and have a diverse portfolio.

I have 1,000 more downloads now than I did months back, and my lifetime rank has made an insignificant change. Less that 200 on the Adobe scale. I'll assume that everyone else, around my range, has also increased 1,000 downloads in the same time and their rank had barely changed. What's to see?  :)

(https://i.postimg.cc/y6y3Hhb1/as-this-week.jpg)

It's Monday, I have no video, I upload when I'm in the mood, which might be one a week, or more when I have a better idea.

I care more about search position and page, than "Hey how am I doing, compared to the next person." My Rank is like views or exposure. There's no pay or benefit.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 15, 2024, 12:30
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...

I recently saw videos for 10 USD and images for 1.65 USD,my RPD on Adobe goes up,if you don't upload Wilm this is the result.

if I were you I would take advantage of your advantageous position,go back to uploading at least 30 contents a month,any type of content and you will see how everything goes back uphill,if you no longer upload anything the system starts to put you aside.

I am in a more disadvantaged position than you,I produce much more than you but I collect less than you,because you started before me,but I know that in a couple of years I will start to harvest the fruits of my work,just as I am now reaping the fruits of what I produced a year ago and more.

this in my opinion is one of the things that has changed a lot in recent years,as time passes we need more and more time to see the results of our work.

Why should the RPD go down, if I don't upload? If the number of downloads would go down, I would agree. But the RPD has nothing to do with it.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 15, 2024, 13:54
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...

I recently saw videos for 10 USD and images for 1.65 USD,my RPD on Adobe goes up,if you don't upload Wilm this is the result.

if I were you I would take advantage of your advantageous position,go back to uploading at least 30 contents a month,any type of content and you will see how everything goes back uphill,if you no longer upload anything the system starts to put you aside.

I am in a more disadvantaged position than you,I produce much more than you but I collect less than you,because you started before me,but I know that in a couple of years I will start to harvest the fruits of my work,just as I am now reaping the fruits of what I produced a year ago and more.

this in my opinion is one of the things that has changed a lot in recent years,as time passes we need more and more time to see the results of our work.

Why should the RPD go down, if I don't upload? If the number of downloads would go down, I would agree. But the RPD has nothing to do with it.

because maybe you make more sales and most likely you also make higher sales?

but please satisfy my curiosity,are you telling me that even if you don't upload your download numbers remains unchanged?If so,how long has it been since you uploaded?

if I may ask of course.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 15, 2024, 15:45
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...

I recently saw videos for 10 USD and images for 1.65 USD,my RPD on Adobe goes up,if you don't upload Wilm this is the result.

if I were you I would take advantage of your advantageous position,go back to uploading at least 30 contents a month,any type of content and you will see how everything goes back uphill,if you no longer upload anything the system starts to put you aside.

I am in a more disadvantaged position than you,I produce much more than you but I collect less than you,because you started before me,but I know that in a couple of years I will start to harvest the fruits of my work,just as I am now reaping the fruits of what I produced a year ago and more.

this in my opinion is one of the things that has changed a lot in recent years,as time passes we need more and more time to see the results of our work.

Why should the RPD go down, if I don't upload? If the number of downloads would go down, I would agree. But the RPD has nothing to do with it.

because maybe you make more sales and most likely you also make higher sales?

but please satisfy my curiosity,are you telling me that even if you don't upload your download numbers remains unchanged?If so,how long has it been since you uploaded?

if I may ask of course.

Of course you may ask.  :)

I've uploaded 13 images in the last six months - so 2 images a month on average. I now have a total of 1567 on Adobe Stock. If you like, I have increased my portfolio by 0.8% in this six-month period. These images have generated a total of 11 downloads - an extremely unsatisfactory result. My hit rate used to be much better.

Nevertheless, as I have already written, the download figures are fairly constant.

And because the download figures are constant, but less money is coming in, there is a problem with the RPD.

Of course, I could upload significantly more, perhaps sell a little more and earn the same money at the end of the day. But that doesn't change the deteriorating RPD. If 1,000 sales used to bring in $ 1,200 and now only bring in $ 750, it's clear that the RPD is clearly trending downwards.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 15, 2024, 16:12
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...

I recently saw videos for 10 USD and images for 1.65 USD,my RPD on Adobe goes up,if you don't upload Wilm this is the result.

if I were you I would take advantage of your advantageous position,go back to uploading at least 30 contents a month,any type of content and you will see how everything goes back uphill,if you no longer upload anything the system starts to put you aside.

I am in a more disadvantaged position than you,I produce much more than you but I collect less than you,because you started before me,but I know that in a couple of years I will start to harvest the fruits of my work,just as I am now reaping the fruits of what I produced a year ago and more.

this in my opinion is one of the things that has changed a lot in recent years,as time passes we need more and more time to see the results of our work.

Why should the RPD go down, if I don't upload? If the number of downloads would go down, I would agree. But the RPD has nothing to do with it.

because maybe you make more sales and most likely you also make higher sales?

but please satisfy my curiosity,are you telling me that even if you don't upload your download numbers remains unchanged?If so,how long has it been since you uploaded?

if I may ask of course.

Of course you may ask.  :)

I've uploaded 13 images in the last six months - so 2 images a month on average. I now have a total of 1567 on Adobe Stock. If you like, I have increased my portfolio by 0.8% in this six-month period. These images have generated a total of 11 downloads - an extremely unsatisfactory result. My hit rate used to be much better.

Nevertheless, as I have already written, the download figures are fairly constant.

And because the download figures are constant, but less money is coming in, there is a problem with the RPD.

Of course, I could upload significantly more, perhaps sell a little more and earn the same money at the end of the day. But that doesn't change the deteriorating RPD. If 1,000 sales used to bring in $ 1,200 and now only bring in $ 750, it's clear that the RPD is clearly trending downwards.

Based on today's RPD 1,000 downloads = $560.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 15, 2024, 16:59
@Wilm

of course if the number of downloads remains more or less constant at this point an RPD is an excellent reference,from here I now understand your concern.

I could write you my RPD on Adobe but my situation is completely different,because my RPD is going up but more importantly I more than doubled the number of sales between 2022 and 2023 and tripled my earnings,so I don't have a constant number of downloads like you and therefore my RPD doesn't matter as much.

I had read that you are losing inspiration somehow,that's maybe even why you're not uploading,music helps me a lot in this,and I always try to look up because if I start looking down I get dizzy :D
or more simply,it's better not to think about the years that are passing and that we are getting older and all the rest,so much is of little use.

but anyway for you this is just a hobby,I aim for something more,I know I still have a lot of work to do and it will take a few more years but I will make it.

thank you for your reply! :)

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 16, 2024, 03:06
@Wilm

of course if the number of downloads remains more or less constant at this point an RPD is an excellent reference,from here I now understand your concern.

I could write you my RPD on Adobe but my situation is completely different,because my RPD is going up but more importantly I more than doubled the number of sales between 2022 and 2023 and tripled my earnings,so I don't have a constant number of downloads like you and therefore my RPD doesn't matter as much.

I had read that you are losing inspiration somehow,that's maybe even why you're not uploading,music helps me a lot in this,and I always try to look up because if I start looking down I get dizzy :D
or more simply,it's better not to think about the years that are passing and that we are getting older and all the rest,so much is of little use.

but anyway for you this is just a hobby,I aim for something more,I know I still have a lot of work to do and it will take a few more years but I will make it.

thank you for your reply! :)

I am pleased for you that your efforts are being rewarded.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 16, 2024, 11:11


I would guess contributors who are in 500 weekly range make 1k + per month

April been brutal for me with no bestsellers for .35, but files that sell are selling for 1.05, $3.30 etc. it’s strange to see higher $ numbers, must be from natural search - without being featured. (My bestsellers have only 6 months life)

Have to produce something new and eye catching that nobody else thought off 🤣
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 16, 2024, 12:22
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...

I recently saw videos for 10 USD and images for 1.65 USD,my RPD on Adobe goes up,if you don't upload Wilm this is the result.

if I were you I would take advantage of your advantageous position,go back to uploading at least 30 contents a month,any type of content and you will see how everything goes back uphill,if you no longer upload anything the system starts to put you aside.

I am in a more disadvantaged position than you,I produce much more than you but I collect less than you,because you started before me,but I know that in a couple of years I will start to harvest the fruits of my work,just as I am now reaping the fruits of what I produced a year ago and more.

this in my opinion is one of the things that has changed a lot in recent years,as time passes we need more and more time to see the results of our work.

Why should the RPD go down, if I don't upload? If the number of downloads would go down, I would agree. But the RPD has nothing to do with it.

because maybe you make more sales and most likely you also make higher sales?

but please satisfy my curiosity,are you telling me that even if you don't upload your download numbers remains unchanged?If so,how long has it been since you uploaded?

if I may ask of course.

Of course you may ask.  :)

I've uploaded 13 images in the last six months - so 2 images a month on average. I now have a total of 1567 on Adobe Stock. If you like, I have increased my portfolio by 0.8% in this six-month period. These images have generated a total of 11 downloads - an extremely unsatisfactory result. My hit rate used to be much better.

Nevertheless, as I have already written, the download figures are fairly constant.

And because the download figures are constant, but less money is coming in, there is a problem with the RPD.

Of course, I could upload significantly more, perhaps sell a little more and earn the same money at the end of the day. But that doesn't change the deteriorating RPD. If 1,000 sales used to bring in $ 1,200 and now only bring in $ 750, it's clear that the RPD is clearly trending downwards.

After all, I have just noticed that one of those 13 pictures - uploaded at the beginning of February - has now achieved 8 sales and has made it to page 1 of 8750 pages on the subject. Maybe there will be more sales to come...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 16, 2024, 14:20
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...

I recently saw videos for 10 USD and images for 1.65 USD,my RPD on Adobe goes up,if you don't upload Wilm this is the result.

if I were you I would take advantage of your advantageous position,go back to uploading at least 30 contents a month,any type of content and you will see how everything goes back uphill,if you no longer upload anything the system starts to put you aside.

I am in a more disadvantaged position than you,I produce much more than you but I collect less than you,because you started before me,but I know that in a couple of years I will start to harvest the fruits of my work,just as I am now reaping the fruits of what I produced a year ago and more.

this in my opinion is one of the things that has changed a lot in recent years,as time passes we need more and more time to see the results of our work.

Why should the RPD go down, if I don't upload? If the number of downloads would go down, I would agree. But the RPD has nothing to do with it.

because maybe you make more sales and most likely you also make higher sales?

but please satisfy my curiosity,are you telling me that even if you don't upload your download numbers remains unchanged?If so,how long has it been since you uploaded?

if I may ask of course.

Of course you may ask.  :)

I've uploaded 13 images in the last six months - so 2 images a month on average. I now have a total of 1567 on Adobe Stock. If you like, I have increased my portfolio by 0.8% in this six-month period. These images have generated a total of 11 downloads - an extremely unsatisfactory result. My hit rate used to be much better.

Nevertheless, as I have already written, the download figures are fairly constant.

And because the download figures are constant, but less money is coming in, there is a problem with the RPD.

Of course, I could upload significantly more, perhaps sell a little more and earn the same money at the end of the day. But that doesn't change the deteriorating RPD. If 1,000 sales used to bring in $ 1,200 and now only bring in $ 750, it's clear that the RPD is clearly trending downwards.

After all, I have just noticed that one of those 13 pictures - uploaded at the beginning of February - has now achieved 8 sales and has made it to page 1 of 8750 pages on the subject. Maybe there will be more sales to come...

this is because you are a long-standing first level contributor,so the sales system favors you.

I'm not an expert on how Adobe's sales system works but I've been following it carefully for several years.

If we take a photo of the same tomato,same exactly picture in all details,and we both send it at the same time for review,you are 90% more likely than me to sell it first,as for now.

if we repeat the experiment in a few years we will instead have 50%

as regards more specific contents,the situation is different.

how can I say it more clearly?your shop is open 24h a day or maybe 15h a day on average mine is open at the moment 3h a day on average(I don't know,it's just an example)

of course it is important what content you have for sale,but it is also important whether you have the favor of the sales system,something that is earned over time.

From what I have seen,Adobe's sales system is the best of all agencies because it is the only one that guarantees growth over time.

other agencies such as SS or Istock are more immediate but do not guarantee a stable income over time,especially in the near future given the current condition of the microstock.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 16, 2024, 15:11
For countless years downloads weren't below 0,38. This is what came in this afternoon - those 0,34 are becoming more and more...

I recently saw videos for 10 USD and images for 1.65 USD,my RPD on Adobe goes up,if you don't upload Wilm this is the result.

if I were you I would take advantage of your advantageous position,go back to uploading at least 30 contents a month,any type of content and you will see how everything goes back uphill,if you no longer upload anything the system starts to put you aside.

I am in a more disadvantaged position than you,I produce much more than you but I collect less than you,because you started before me,but I know that in a couple of years I will start to harvest the fruits of my work,just as I am now reaping the fruits of what I produced a year ago and more.

this in my opinion is one of the things that has changed a lot in recent years,as time passes we need more and more time to see the results of our work.

Why should the RPD go down, if I don't upload? If the number of downloads would go down, I would agree. But the RPD has nothing to do with it.

because maybe you make more sales and most likely you also make higher sales?

but please satisfy my curiosity,are you telling me that even if you don't upload your download numbers remains unchanged?If so,how long has it been since you uploaded?

if I may ask of course.

Of course you may ask.  :)

I've uploaded 13 images in the last six months - so 2 images a month on average. I now have a total of 1567 on Adobe Stock. If you like, I have increased my portfolio by 0.8% in this six-month period. These images have generated a total of 11 downloads - an extremely unsatisfactory result. My hit rate used to be much better.

Nevertheless, as I have already written, the download figures are fairly constant.

And because the download figures are constant, but less money is coming in, there is a problem with the RPD.

Of course, I could upload significantly more, perhaps sell a little more and earn the same money at the end of the day. But that doesn't change the deteriorating RPD. If 1,000 sales used to bring in $ 1,200 and now only bring in $ 750, it's clear that the RPD is clearly trending downwards.

After all, I have just noticed that one of those 13 pictures - uploaded at the beginning of February - has now achieved 8 sales and has made it to page 1 of 8750 pages on the subject. Maybe there will be more sales to come...

this is because you are a long-standing first level contributor,so the sales system favors you.

I'm not an expert on how Adobe's sales system works but I've been following it carefully for several years.

If we take a photo of the same tomato,same exactly picture in all details,and we both send it at the same time for review,you are 90% more likely than me to sell it first,as for now.

if we repeat the experiment in a few years we will instead have 50%

as regards more specific contents,the situation is different.

how can I say it more clearly?your shop is open 24h a day or maybe 15h a day on average mine is open at the moment 3h a day on average(I don't know,it's just an example)

of course it is important what content you have for sale,but it is also important whether you have the favor of the sales system,something that is earned over time.

From what I have seen,Adobe's sales system is the best of all agencies because it is the only one that guarantees growth over time.

other agencies such as SS or Istock are more immediate but do not guarantee a stable income over time,especially in the near future given the current condition of the microstock.

I don't know how the algorithm works either. Nobody knows that.

But I agree with you because I still suspect that the portfolio ranking might have an influence on the starting ranking of new images. And a portfolio that has been on the market for much longer naturally has an easier time of it than a contributor who has just started out.

With $36 today at AS has made up for yesterday and so the RPD has also improved a little this month.
However, AS is developing a bit like shutterstock: you are dependent on the large downloads to compensate for the increasing mass of small downloads. And I don't like this development! For me, the number of licenses sold for $3.30 at AS has dropped noticeably in recent months.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 16, 2024, 16:13
yes Wilm,this is probably what ranking is for,then I'm pretty sure that some contents are highlighted if they are well done and original,interesting and all the rest.

I have a lot of content on the first search pages,but they are mostly very specific content,which have a lower demand than a cat,but when they sell they are always good USD,that's why maybe my RPD is going up,and also because I have some videos, and now that the beautiful season has begun I will add more.

in any case,congratulations! :) because you have a content page 1 of 8750 pages and it's a great satisfaction!

I had a content 1 of 20,000 pages for an entire year on Istock a content on which I worked for 3 whole days,after a year it remained on the first page for another year but not as first place...it was a great satisfaction! :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on April 17, 2024, 01:09
For the first time ever I had a download for $0,33 this morning. The race to the bottom has started…
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 17, 2024, 03:14
fwiw i am down to pos 6580

Clearly I don‘t have enough of the right content for this time of year

:(
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 17, 2024, 05:24
only 4 sales and I already reach the April 2023 sales number,and just a couple of dollars and I already reach the April 2023 earnings.

so this month will be better than April 2023 I think 40-50% more as expected.

Adobe's sales system is like clockwork  ;)

the minimum sale has been 0.34 so far this month but only one,many sales above 1 usd.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 17, 2024, 06:11
I have already passed my total income from april 2023, so perhaps i should not complain.

But the extreme drop after good high is always depressing.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 17, 2024, 08:58
.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 18, 2024, 09:33
I have already passed my total income from april 2023, so perhaps i should not complain.

But the extreme drop after good high is always depressing.

How many years you’ve been contributing to Adobe and how many pages you have?

PS: yes, the swings are quite wild lately. I’m more than 60% down in April
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 18, 2024, 10:35
I started contributing in 2013 when I left my istock exclusivity. Uploaded my best files and had some good sales, but then basically stopped doing stock for 10 years, at least I hardly uploaded to Adobe.

I had around 1400 files in 2022. Started to upload again seriously in September 22 and then when ai was accepted made a big push with that last year.

Now I have around 4400 files.

When I started uploading again, it was all my old photo bestsellers that started being active again, the ai files took many months to get taken up by clients.

This year my main focus is adding ai illustrations. Because I have no algo track record, the uptake is very, very slow, but I think longterm it will be worth having one more medium.

Next month I will start doing normal photo/video shootings again, also because I need content for other agencies.

I will probably need 12k files to have much better balance.

But overall I guess I should not complain.

If the content is needed, then my sales rise very, very fast. But when the event is over, the drop is just as quick and very brutal.

Now down to 6700 weekly rank. Highest I ever reached, but only for one day, was 250.

The "average" seems to be around 3200. But with very, very wild swings.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 18, 2024, 20:31
He-he Cobalt, We always think the grass is greener on the other side: you are doing AI illustrations and I’m doing AI photos 🤣 I always thought photos are the money makers: look at all office and tech people that are so wildly popular! (and my illustrations of flowers are not selling well) I’m so tempted to go and take photos of office people, but one probably needs actors for releases? And real offices are so messy!

So question for earlier contributors, what’s the slowest month? It should be April, correct?

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 18, 2024, 20:58
for me the slowest months are july august, especially in Europe many companies close down for 4 weeks.

business teams is probably the best money maker, but you no longer need people in suits. you can do messy tech start ups. which is probably even more difficult to get it right than the classic penthouse glass office.

anything with real people needs great models, many hire professional actors.

or you need a photographer who is really, really good at getting natural expressions out of normal people.

you can try doing people teams with ai. it is also something i want to learn this year.

but the more people in the image, the more mistakes.

i had such high hopes for my ai flower illustrations…well, maybe better to do abstract people instead

:)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 19, 2024, 10:19
Don’t give up hopes for your flowers, just because my flowers don’t sell the best. May be your flowers will become bestsellers! Obviously there are flowers that sell great!
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 26, 2024, 11:25
Is weekly rank only Downloads?

That's what we've been told and what people have said, for many years.

Because of this thread a small group of people, outside of MSG have been comparing Weekly Rank. Good fun. I was trying to see what the limits are on how low, not just the good news side.

One person has a lower rank than I do, with same same number of downloads. Of course there could be lag in reporting, so I have more invisible DLs or something. But a day later, she has more downloads and he rank is still lower than mine, with the same # of downloads.

Does anyone know for sure, for a fact, what the truth is, and how Weekly Rank - which is actually Position, is calculated? I rely on what we've been told in the past and I trusted that. Now for some reason, the numbers and position, don't match. There could be some other explanation, and the number is intended to be Downloads Only. But I'm just asking, in case there has been a change or the well known fact, isn't a fact?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 26, 2024, 12:03
Don’t give up hopes for your flowers, just because my flowers don’t sell the best. May be your flowers will become bestsellers! Obviously there are flowers that sell great!

flowers?why not?they are beautiful and everyone likes them,I have always liked giving flowers to my girls! :D

flowers and plants,if indexed well,can sell as well as anything else.

I don't know how the weekly ranking works,I think it's more about the number of sales.

I'm having a lot of fun with the hybrid content,I'm pretty sure they'll sell well! :)

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 26, 2024, 12:12
He-he Cobalt, We always think the grass is greener on the other side: you are doing AI illustrations and I’m doing AI photos 🤣 I always thought photos are the money makers: look at all office and tech people that are so wildly popular! (and my illustrations of flowers are not selling well) I’m so tempted to go and take photos of office people, but one probably needs actors for releases? And real offices are so messy!

So question for earlier contributors, what’s the slowest month? It should be April, correct?

my slowest months are December and January,from February to November are the best months for me even August,and it is also my favorite time of year,because I really don't like winter.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on April 26, 2024, 12:29
My download numbers are going down and down every week...
Until 5 weeks ago I had an average of about 160 downloads, then it dropped significantly from one week to the next by about 15% and this week it dropped again by about 10%.

My previous top sellers suddenly 5 weeks ago disappeared from the sales (they are all still available in the search as far as I can see).

So in total within 5 weeks from 160 downloads to now about 120.

I don't know what's going on - at least for me it's going down rapidly without any recognizable reason that I can see.
If anyone has a good idea of what I'm missing - keep them coming :-)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on April 26, 2024, 12:32
Sry, double post
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 26, 2024, 12:53
this is a holiday period, easter, orthodox easter, eid, spring breaks in various parts of the world

my weekly rank has dropped to 5400 and I will be lucky if I get 90 downloads this week…

may is also a time with lots of holidays and then you move towards the summer season.

trying to upload a lot of content for summer/autumn, hope it helps.

also trying to upload and do more normal videos and photos for other places.

so, you are not alone and actually doing much better than me at the moment.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 26, 2024, 14:01
My download numbers are going down and down every week...
Until 5 weeks ago I had an average of about 160 downloads, then it dropped significantly from one week to the next by about 15% and this week it dropped again by about 10%.

My previous top sellers suddenly 5 weeks ago disappeared from the sales (they are all still available in the search as far as I can see).

So in total within 5 weeks from 160 downloads to now about 120.

I don't know what's going on - at least for me it's going down rapidly without any recognizable reason that I can see.
If anyone has a good idea of what I'm missing - keep them coming :-)

I'm sorry to hear this,but most likely soon you will be back to selling even more than before in my opinion,and in my opinion it applies to all those who are currently seeing a decline in sales,are periods and that's it.

for me this month is so far about 45% more in terms of sales and about 35% more earnings compared to April 2023.

I never compare how it went 5 weeks ago or two months ago or 6 months ago,for me the only really important thing is the total annual profit,and therefore for me it is only important to be able to do better month by month compared to the previous year,and this year so far I have managed to do better every month than in the same month in 2023.

for the moment I continue to rise,slowly,but I rise,but my weekly ranking does not rise much,in fact it has even fallen a bit,and this means that in general many are doing much better than me,so don't worry,everything will go up again soon! :)



Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 26, 2024, 14:53
compared to april 23 i am up by 51%, so I should probably not complain. but compared to march 24 I am down by 57%...

and...it is far from enough money, so...I will complain ;)

summer is always very slow for me.

what is good is that many of the illustrations that I uploaded last year, that never got a single sale, are slowly beginning to sell. I simply have no "footsteps" in the algos for illustration.

for now illustrations are perhaps 5% of my sales, although it is over 20% of my port. longterm I hope it will increase and I will learn what I can produce that customers like to buy.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 26, 2024, 15:20
compared to april 23 i am up by 51%, so I should probably not complain. but compared to march 24 I am down by 57%...

and...it is far from enough money, so...I will complain ;)

summer is always very slow for me.

what is good is that many of the illustrations that I uploaded last year, that never got a single sale, are slowly beginning to sell. I simply have no "footsteps" in the algos for illustration.

for now illustrations are perhaps 5% of my sales, although it is over 20% of my port. longterm I hope it will increase and I will learn what I can produce that customers like to buy.

and what about March 2023?70% more? ;)

Cobalt,If I was already earning as much as you,I would probably have a party every day! :D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on April 26, 2024, 15:48
Thanks @Cobalt & @InjusticeForAll

It's good to know that you're not alone in the downward trend - of course it would be nicer if things were looking up for everyone :)

I had already flirted a little with the 2,000 position, but now it's heading strongly towards 4,000 ^^
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 26, 2024, 17:41
misery loves company and all that ;)

on the german istock board we used to have a dedicated thread where we could go and complain about low sales. it was great fun.

but there are people moving up now, and it is important to learn what kind of content is in demand now.

lots of sport themes around the olympics, lots of family and people doing summer things, lots of ai related themes etc...

next year I will be better prepared.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on April 26, 2024, 18:03
misery loves company and all that ;)
...
lots of sport themes around the olympics, lots of family and people doing summer things, lots of ai related themes etc...

I have to admit that after my account block in October '23 I didn't dare to upload pictures on the subject of the Olympics - the Olympics is a subject with many legal problems and I can't afford another account block :-)

This week I have 109 downloads on Friday evening, position 3,450.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 26, 2024, 22:31
you don't do olympics with olympic rings or anything copyright related

you do people celebrating with gold medals, people doing sports, large stadions around the major olympic summer sports

general sports competition stuff and obviously never any copyright danger keywords

winner loser scenarios, goals, achievement, hard work success can also be used in many other themes outside of sparts as well

same like for content that supports the superbowl time, world football competitions, the oscars etc...there is also something you can do that is free of copyright but works for these events
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 27, 2024, 05:36
Yes,exactly,a good idea is to try to represent something protected by IP in a generic way,so that it doesn't violate copyright.

apart from someone who genuinely makes a mistake,without meaning to,many believe they are smart,they first go through the review and then change the title and maybe keywords,adding brand names,and various IP,trying to increase sales this way.

I often find generic photos on Adobe Stock with brand names and events protected by copyright,these images would never have passed review with that type of indexing,and it is clear that they modify them after the review.

this is a very dangerous game,because sooner or later Adobe obviously finds these contents indexed irregularly and then blocks begin.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on April 27, 2024, 06:07
you don't do olympics with olympic rings or anything copyright related
The subject of the Olympics has a special aftertaste for me... A long time ago, when I was still working as a game developer, I once received a letter from the Olympic Association with a large number in it and a “cease and desist order” - since then the subject has been taboo for me :-)

And yes, of course I also have sports pictures without naming brands and without logos.

It always surprises me when you enter “Olympic” in the search, how many images are listed there - a real powder keg.
You also see a lot of images with three stripes sportswear and Nike logos.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 27, 2024, 11:33
Is weekly rank only Downloads?

Does anyone know for sure, for a fact, what the truth is, and how Weekly Rank - which is actually Position, is calculated?

Was that a really tough question and no one really knows?

I was working on, maybe it changes at Midnight, but the DLs number changes as they occur? So considering that and some from the past, maybe the variable is WHEN is it calculated as well?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 27, 2024, 16:01
the downloads change regularly with growing sales, the weekly rank resets once a day.

wednesday is also a public holiday in many countries, so many people are having a long weekend or holiday.

hope people get bck to work soon.

pos 5620, i am officially depressed lol!


eta

I am trying to upload a lot more people content. but because i have no "footsteps in the algos" of the people market, it will probably take a year before they really start to sell and customers start bookmarking me as a resource.

also adding more food, that usually does better with me than people.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 28, 2024, 05:23
@Pete,the key factor is most likely "when" it is calculated,and in my opinion the number of sales is the rank,but the weekly ranking changes a lot,obviously I think that what really matters is the complete ranking,that for me continues to go better,let's say I recover 100 positions every week in the complete ranking.

@Cobalt I see that you are going down quite a bit  :( , but i think because for the sales system,you have already reached your goal this month,as you have already earned 50% more than April 2023,and is giving more space to others,because in my opinion,Adobe's sales system must give space to everyone,and over time it allows you to increase sales,at least this is my experience.

next month you will go back up again! :)

I don't know about uploading to other agencies,yesterday I was comparing my sales on SS in April with the April sales of another contributor who has a much more varied portfolio than mine,as he is lucky enough to travel a lot and have more money to invest than me in general,but despite this I earned more than him on SS,even though I don't have big sales this month on SS.

in my opinion,as I have already said,uploading to other agencies is no longer of much use,it only serves to increase the race to the bottom.

as far as I'm concerned,working only on Adobe brings me many advantages,I have the opportunity to take care of my portfolio in a better way in many aspects.

I believe that someone want to base the portfolio with AI,need to produce in very large quantities,which is why I prefer to focus on real and hybrid content,because producing large quantities isn't really my style.

However,if anyone is interested in my opinion,I don't think that AI content can have a long life,of course it can be sold,but it is too easy to replicate and in general there is too much competition,working only with AI can result in a huge waste of time in the long term.

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 28, 2024, 17:49
I dom‘t think it makes a big difference because ai can also copy normal photos easily.

Only editorial would be safe from ai.

But the majority of new producvers just make copies of copies of existing content, just like they do with normal photos.

However with ai, the content is now at least well lit and has a professional look.

You still need to build a port and find your niche.

After the gold rush many ai producers will move on to the next thing.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 28, 2024, 18:09
I dom‘t think it makes a big difference because ai can also copy normal photos easily.

Only editorial would be safe from ai.

But the majority of new producvers just make copies of copies of existing content, just like they do with normal photos.

However with ai, the content is now at least well lit and has a professional look.

You still need to build a port and find your niche.

After the gold rush many ai producers will move on to the next thing.

I don't agree with this  :)

there is a lot of content that AI simply can't do,not just editorial,just as there is content that only AI can do,that's why it's important to try to do everything,if possible.

I definitely still have a lot of work to do,but more than anything it's also a question of time.

I am quite certain that even if I continue to upload only 20 contents per month I will continue to earn more,because I already have thousands of contents and above all it is a question of time.

but obviously I don't want to do this experiment because the quantity certainly has its weight.

better to always continue to give the best.

to change the world you have to be a dreamer! :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 28, 2024, 20:50
I’m also sliding downwards 4270
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: derby on April 29, 2024, 05:12
Exactly same trend for me I was around position 3000 and in a couple of week I'm down to 4690

About how position is calculated, my opinion is that it counts last seven days and is updated continuously day by day, so if you have a great day you go up even if the day after should be very poor. It's not calculated on fixed week monday/sunday (for example) but it's from today plus six days back downloads
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 29, 2024, 09:03
Well, we might be going down, but Adobe itself is still selling well. Otherwise our ranking would go up even if our sales are slowing down.

So we simply don't have the right content for what buyers are looking for right now.

I did upload quite a bit of summer content, but I think it arrived too late and just like with people I have no footsteps in the summer algos.

Next year will be better.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 29, 2024, 10:47
Well, we might be going down, but Adobe itself is still selling well. Otherwise our ranking would go up even if our sales are slowing down.

So we simply don't have the right content for what buyers are looking for right now.

I did upload quite a bit of summer content, but I think it arrived too late and just like with people I have no footsteps in the summer algos.

Next year will be better.
I do have spring and summer seasonal content, so I can’t use that excuse. This Monday is even worse, I think if portal is on the downward, then it’s shown less. What’s interesting is that my images that are selling usually well, stopped selling but images that never sold are now selling, but are one hit wonders.

I wonder if algorithms changed?

PS: for example I have older traditional photograph that I’ve made to png that use to  sell every day, it’s timeless, not seasonal - now it stopped. My seasonal best seller also stopped

It’s strange that from this thread we are all going downwards. Did I miss anyone? Anyone is selling well?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on April 29, 2024, 10:56
As for Olympics, Im friends with a multiple times Olympian and medalist 🙂 Very humble, nice and now on anxiety meds man. It’s mind blowing how nervous he was before his starts. He holds one of the World’s Records.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on April 29, 2024, 10:58
There is someone here who,despite being an active contributor,that upload at least 30-40 content per month on average,did earn less than April 2023?

I earned already 50% more than in April 2023,so the ranking doesn't matter,for the moment everything is fine! :)

we are all in the hands of the sales system.

fortunately Adobe's sales system is the best among all agencies,because it allows everyone to grow and earn more over time,unless you are a terrible contributor who only has photos of stones indexed in a generic way,well,in this case I don't think the sales system can help you much! :D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cascoly on April 29, 2024, 12:43
you don't do olympics with olympic rings or anything copyright related
...

same like for content that supports the superbowl time, world football competitions, the oscars etc...there is also something you can do that is free of copyright but works for these events

at one point the Olympic committee sued the Olympic national Park here in Washington  (capital Olympia) for trademark violation. my company name CAScadeOLYmpics (2 mtn rages seen from seattle)has been safe so far
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on April 29, 2024, 15:30
Well, we might be going down, but Adobe itself is still selling well. Otherwise our ranking would go up even if our sales are slowing down.

So we simply don't have the right content for what buyers are looking for right now.

I did upload quite a bit of summer content, but I think it arrived too late and just like with people I have no footsteps in the summer algos.

Next year will be better.
I do have spring and summer seasonal content, so I can’t use that excuse. This Monday is even worse, I think if portal is on the downward, then it’s shown less. What’s interesting is that my images that are selling usually well, stopped selling but images that never sold are now selling, but are one hit wonders.

I wonder if algorithms changed?

PS: for example I have older traditional photograph that I’ve made to png that use to  sell every day, it’s timeless, not seasonal - now it stopped. My seasonal best seller also stopped

It’s strange that from this thread we are all going downwards. Did I miss anyone? Anyone is selling well?

There seems to be a shake up in the algos, all my test searches look different. But I still have content in roughly the same positions, but it is different content, often newer.

It does not seem to affect sales, but perhaps some files will get some fresh love.

This is the May first week with public holidays in many countries. Many people taking the whole week off.

Next week will be interesting.

Actually a good time for Adobe to reset algos, it will creep in gradually.

eta

over all agencies compared to April 23 I am up by 60%, but down 54% compared to March 24.

But the overall trend is encouraging, so we will see.

Illustrations are still 5-10% of my total sales, even though now nearly half my uploads are illustrations. I hope it will pay off next year.

Must do more video and normal photos...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on April 30, 2024, 10:30
Exactly same trend for me I was around position 3000 and in a couple of week I'm down to 4690

About how position is calculated, my opinion is that it counts last seven days and is updated continuously day by day, so if you have a great day you go up even if the day after should be very poor. It's not calculated on fixed week monday/sunday (for example) but it's from today plus six days back downloads

Odd, my weekly position, resets on Sunday every week.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: bpawesome on April 30, 2024, 10:51
Weekly and Lifetime positions are simply cached and are updated every hour
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Sebastian Radu on May 01, 2024, 05:38
In my case, even though I kept uploading new images (mostly AI) the rank went down dramatically. What's more interesting is that new images (uploaded more than two months ago) are not selling at all.
I see this as Adobe going on a downward trend.

 :-\
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on May 01, 2024, 07:15
my rank improved a little bit to 5380

also selling some files that never had a sales

my test searches find my images in decent positions, but it is often different content from the same genre. looks like they are mixing things up a bit, which is probably a good thing.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: JustAnImage on May 01, 2024, 09:10
I just checked my position stats for the last 4 weeks:
- lost 1.160 places in the last 22 days since 10. April (down to 4.100 from 2.940)
- lost 870 places in the last 8 days since 23. April (down to 4.100 from 3.230)

And the account is anything but inactive - since January 01, 2024 I have 4,130 accepted files, of which about 15% are photos, 5% videos, 80% AI images (acceptance rate in April was 92.7%)

But at the moment it's only going in one direction and it's pointing massively downwards - no idea what's going on at AdobeStock, it's pretty bad for me anyway.

Actually it feels a little like this ;-)
-> https://stock.adobe.com/de/images/down-the-drain-created-with-generative-ai-technology/620715012
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on May 01, 2024, 09:45
I don‘t think the new content can raise sales immediately. 6 months from now or next year you will see results.

My sales are always down drastically after easter until september  because I don’t have enough good content for the season.

Should have uploaded more suitable content 6 months ago.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on May 01, 2024, 10:08
good sales even today,I have nothing to complain about! :)

as far as rankings are concerned,it is plausible to think that the new generation of AI producers is taking off,there are more and more new contributors who produce hundreds or thousands of AI content per month,and are therefore climbing the ranks.

but all this doesn't matter to me,because even if my ranking remains the same or drops,the important thing is that my sales increase.

then as I already said,in my opinion basing a portfolio only on AI is a mistake in the long term,just as not making AI content is a mistake too!

we have to try to do everything,and be active every month,otherwise earnings may start to decline in a few months,or perhaps longer,it depends on how solid your portfolio is.

I also sell some new content in a week or two,but most of it takes time,It depends on what it is,and also luck obviously,that always helps! :)

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on May 01, 2024, 20:41
Agree with Cobalt that new content takes time to sell, for me it’s usually 2-4 months. I rarely sell freshly uploaded images, and if it sells once, it usually never sells again (?) so I upload and forget about them. I finally have 29 pages!!! 3710 weekly - going up a bit. My weekly changes daily and it seems that it reflects yesterday, not today sales. (My sales sucked today, but yesterday was better)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Uncle Pete on May 02, 2024, 15:09
Weekly and Lifetime positions are simply cached and are updated every hour

Fine theory, hourly updates on position. I'll have to watch some day and check hourly. I'll need to be terribly bored or doing some other tedious project.  :)

I thought it was only once a day. Hourly or more often, makes more sense.

Problem is... what I quoted and wrote about.

Exactly same trend for me I was around position 3000 and in a couple of week I'm down to 4690

About how position is calculated, my opinion is that it counts last seven days and is updated continuously day by day, so if you have a great day you go up even if the day after should be very poor. It's not calculated on fixed week monday/sunday (for example) but it's from today plus six days back downloads

Because on Sunday it resets to zero, so it's not a running 7 day total. Unless the Derby post was about lifetime, but then why mention weeks?

Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: blvdone on May 08, 2024, 08:33
Slow week so far, but weekly ranking is above average.  Must be a slow week for everybody.  It's possible more buyers started generating their own AI images via Midjourney etc instead of buying our images.  That's my concern about near future.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: wds on May 08, 2024, 08:35
Slow week so far, but weekly ranking is above average.  Must be a slow week for everybody.  It's possible more buyers started generating their own AI images via Midjourney etc instead of buying our images.  That's my concern about near future.

A valid concern, but I don't think you would see a sudden drop at this point because of AI competition. I would guess it would be more gradual.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: derby on May 08, 2024, 10:16
Exactly same trend for me I was around position 3000 and in a couple of week I'm down to 4690

About how position is calculated, my opinion is that it counts last seven days and is updated continuously day by day, so if you have a great day you go up even if the day after should be very poor. It's not calculated on fixed week monday/sunday (for example) but it's from today plus six days back downloads

Because on Sunday it resets to zero, so it's not a running 7 day total. Unless the Derby post was about lifetime, but then why mention weeks?

I don't see any reset on sunday... Total weekly download reset to zero, that's true; but the position ranking doesn't reset at all, it remains quite near the previous days :-)
Well, this is what I see... I think...
I can't be sure of course :-)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: SuperPhoto on May 08, 2024, 11:14
Slow week so far, but weekly ranking is above average.  Must be a slow week for everybody.  It's possible more buyers started generating their own AI images via Midjourney etc instead of buying our images.  That's my concern about near future.

I don't believe that is necessarily an issue. It is still "work" (at the moment) to set up a midjourney account. Get a discord account. Figure out how to use discord. Subscribe to their service. Figure out how to do a 'proper' prompt, etc. Even if it was an "easy" web-based interface (and remember - midjourney uses STOLEN content) - it would still be 'work'. Not to mention the 'pesky' little 'problem' of 'removing watermarks' (i.e., because the images were based off of STOLEN content, so needing to remove the watermark).

There is a difference between getting 10-15 nice 'fresh' ideas, and 'having to figure out' yourself do you want someone standing, sitting, reading, etc. Much easier to just 'browse' for something.

So there is still a market for produced images.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on May 08, 2024, 12:59
slow week, but rank moving up

it is still a holiday season in many places, people taking time off.

tomorrow is a public holiday in Germany, next week are celebrations elsewhere...etc...may is a spring holiday time.

should pick up around the 20th, if you have good summer content.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on May 08, 2024, 17:55
Can confirm a very slow week down in the southern hemisphere too.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on May 09, 2024, 02:55
I dropped down to a weekly rank of 6340, it was many, many months ago that my rank was this low.

A lot of the content I was hoping would sell now is still in the queue, over 30 days now
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on May 09, 2024, 04:24
slow month for me too so far,on average with last year for the moment,but I think should start recovering next week.

strange is that my rank is going up even though sales have been going down lately,so it really seems like a general slowdown.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: cobalt on May 09, 2024, 05:04
Initially my rank was also rising with slowing sales, now it dropped over 1000 poits from 5180 to 6340. And I consider both values very low :(

Anyway...upload, upload, upload..
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: mike123 on May 09, 2024, 09:01
My rank is also pretty good right now at 3600, while the sales are slow. Used to be over 4000 just weeks ago. So it must be a generally slow time at Adobe
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on May 09, 2024, 09:36
Initially my rank was also rising with slowing sales, now it dropped over 1000 poits from 5180 to 6340. And I consider both values very low :(

Anyway...upload, upload, upload..

yes,I've been uploading a lot lately too,I've made a lot of videos lately,tomorrow I'll make more,in the meantime I'll finish the day with some photos. :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: BelieveInStock on May 09, 2024, 11:38
I confirm, something strange is happening with Adobe this week. Sales are even worse than Easter week. Normally I have well over 200 downloads a day, today barely 100
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: bpawesome on May 09, 2024, 12:10
I confirm, something strange is happening with Adobe this week. Sales are even worse than Easter week. Normally I have well over 200 downloads a day, today barely 100

Did you notice a sales drop from last year? I see a huge difference, and the last few weeks there is another ~20% drop in revenue...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: BelieveInStock on May 09, 2024, 12:29
I confirm, something strange is happening with Adobe this week. Sales are even worse than Easter week. Normally I have well over 200 downloads a day, today barely 100

Did you notice a sales drop from last year? I see a huge difference, and the last few weeks there is another ~20% drop in revenue...

Yes, very similar observations. And I used to be around 100th in weekly rank, now closer to 200th ...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Injustice for all on May 09, 2024, 13:51
I don't think there is anything to worry about,as far as I'm concerned the trend is similar to last year,I just checked,next weekthere will be an improvement,with a few scattered clouds,and local showers,but after May 20th the sun it will shine again over much of the region and the temperature will rise again!  :D
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Wilm on May 09, 2024, 15:09
I confirm, something strange is happening with Adobe this week. Sales are even worse than Easter week. Normally I have well over 200 downloads a day, today barely 100

Absolutely impressing. May I ask how many images you have online at AS?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: BelieveInStock on May 10, 2024, 02:14
Around 20k including a few thousand AI generated added last year. A one-man business.
I am seeing a lot of people copying my image titles and generating AI images that are very similar to mine. They don't even bother to change even one characted in the title.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: bpawesome on May 10, 2024, 02:32
Around 20k including a few thousand AI generated added last year. A one-man business.
I am seeing a lot of people copying my image titles and generating AI images that are very similar to mine. They don't even bother to change even one characted in the title.

Impressive, how long are you doing this? are you still uploading new content?
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: BelieveInStock on May 10, 2024, 02:49
Around 20k including a few thousand AI generated added last year. A one-man business.
I am seeing a lot of people copying my image titles and generating AI images that are very similar to mine. They don't even bother to change even one characted in the title.

Impressive, how long are you doing this? are you still uploading new content?

15 years or so. I keep uploading on regular basis but feeling more and more discouraged. The worst thing that may happen to you is when you are in weekly top sellers. Next week all you portfolio is copied x-times by AI prompters.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on May 10, 2024, 11:09
Around 20k including a few thousand AI generated added last year. A one-man business.
I am seeing a lot of people copying my image titles and generating AI images that are very similar to mine. They don't even bother to change even one characted in the title.

Impressive, how long are you doing this? are you still uploading new content?

I keep uploading on regular basis but feeling more and more discouraged. The worst thing that may happen to you is when you are in weekly top sellers. Next week all you portfolio is copied x-times by AI prompters.
Ditto to that, I thought I was the only one who didn’t like to be in weekly top sellers for that exact reason. Especially after the reply NeoLeo got from Adobe after his whole portfolio was clearly copied - it is very discouraging.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on May 10, 2024, 17:41
Sales recovered more at the end of the week. Had a couple of $26+ sales which helped to recover RPD, with one even being a photo sale of $26.40! Don't know if I've ever had a photo sale that high on Adobe before.
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Jo Ann Snover on May 10, 2024, 19:37
... one even being a photo sale of $26.40! Don't know if I've ever had a photo sale that high on Adobe before.

That's an extended license royalty - congrats. They don't happen often any more and are often discounted - your customer paid at full price :) $79.99 * 0.33 = $26.3967
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on May 10, 2024, 20:33
... one even being a photo sale of $26.40! Don't know if I've ever had a photo sale that high on Adobe before.

That's an extended license royalty - congrats. They don't happen often any more and are often discounted - your customer paid at full price :) $79.99 * 0.33 = $26.3967

Very interesting. Thanks for that info. 
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: mike123 on May 11, 2024, 06:42
Sales recovered more at the end of the week. Had a couple of $26+ sales which helped to recover RPD, with one even being a photo sale of $26.40! Don't know if I've ever had a photo sale that high on Adobe before.
I think that's for an extended license. They are usually discounted though, just got two 21.12$ ones last week. So congrats on getting an non-discounted one :)
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Pacesetter on May 12, 2024, 08:27
Couple of really good video sales earlier tonight...
Title: Re: What's your weekly ranking and how many images?
Post by: Mifornia on May 12, 2024, 19:09
My best week after 2 months of tanked sales. Fingers crossed that it will continue to improve!
Mother’s Day images for me didn’t do well.

(One day last year I woke up to a client buying several $26 licenses! That was fantastic, but happened only once.)